Megane Berline handbook

Renault MEGANE
Driver’s handbook
A passion for performance
ELF, partner of
RENAULT recommends ELF
Partners in cutting-edge automotive technology, Elf and Renault combine their expertise on both
the racetrack and the city streets. This enduring partnership gives drivers a range of lubricants
perfectly suited to Renault cars. Lasting protection and optimum performance for your engine –
guaranteed. Whether changing the oil or simply topping up, to find the approved ELF lubricant
best suited to your vehicle, ask your Renault dealer for a recommendation or consult your vehicle maintenance handbook.
www.lubricants.elf.com
A brand from
Welcome to your new vehicle
This Driver’s Handbook contains the information necessary:
– for you to familiarise yourself with your vehicle, to use it to its best advantage and to benefit fully from the all the functions and
the technical developments it incorporates.
– to ensure that it always gives the best performance by following the simple, but comprehensive advice concerning regular maintenance.
– to enable you to deal quickly with minor faults not requiring specialist attention.
It is well worth taking a few minutes to read this handbook to familiarise yourself with the information and guidelines it contains
about the vehicle and its functions and new features. If certain points are still unclear, our Network technicians will be only too
pleased to provide you with any additional information.
The following symbol will help you when reading this handbook:
To indicate a hazard, danger or safety recommendation.
The descriptions of the models given in this handbook are based on the technical specifications at the time of writing. This handbook covers all items of equipment (both standard and optional) available for these models but whether or not these are
fitted to the vehicle depends on the version, options selected and the country where the vehicle is sold.
This handbook may also contain information about items of equipment to be introduced later in the model year.
Throughout the manual, the “approved Dealer” is your RENAULT Dealer.
Enjoy driving your new vehicle.
Translated from French. Copying or translation, in part or in full, is forbidden unless prior written permission has been obtained from the vehicle manufacturer.
0.1
0.2
C
O
N
T
E
N
T
S
Sections
Getting to know your vehicle ...............................
1
Driving
2
...................................................................
Your comfort
.........................................................
3
Maintenance
.........................................................
4
Practical advice
....................................................
......................................
6
...............................................
7
Technical specifications
Alphabetical index
5
0.3
0.4
Section 1: Getting to know your vehicle
Key, radio frequency remote control: general information, use, deadlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
The RENAULT card: general information and use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
Locking/unlocking the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13
Opening and closing the doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16
Automatic locking when driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19
Headrests - Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20
Seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23
Additional methods of restraint: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27
in addition to the front seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.27
to the rear seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.31
side protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.32
Child safety: General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34
choosing a child seat mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.37
Fitting a child seat, general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.40
Child seats: attachment by seat belt or by Isofix system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.42
deactivating/activating the front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.48
Audible and visual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.51
Driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.52
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.56
trip computer and warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.68
vehicle settings customisation menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.78
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.80
Power-assisted steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.81
Clock and outdoor temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.82
Rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.83
Headlight beam adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.85
Exterior lighting and signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.87
Washers, wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.92
Fuel tank (filling with fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.100
1.1
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (1/2)
1 Locks all the opening elements.
2 Unlocks all the opening elements.
3
3 Ignition and front door key.
5 Locking/unlocking of the boot only.
3
2
1
2
1
4
5
Remote control with switchblade
key:
4 Locking/unlocking using the switchblade key. To release the insert from
its housing, press button 4, it comes
out automatically. Press button 4 and
guide the insert back into its housing.
5
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Advice
Avoid leaving the remote control in
hot, cold or humid areas.
The key must not be used for any
function other than those described
in the handbook (removing the cap
from a bottle, etc.).
1.2
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
KEY, RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: general information (2/2)
Radio frequency remote
control operating range
This varies according to the surroundings: take care not to lock or unlock the
doors by inadvertently pressing the buttons on the remote control.
Note: If a door or the boot is open or
not closed properly, the doors and boot
lock/unlock in quick succession.
Interference
Interference by factors in the immediate
vicinity (external installations or the use
of equipment operating on the same
frequency as the remote control) may
affect the operation of the remote control.
Replacement and additional keys
or remote controls.
You must only contact an approved
dealer:
– If you need to replace a key it will
be necessary to take the vehicle
and all of its keys to an approved
Dealer in order to initialise the
system.
– Depending on the vehicle, you
have the option of using up to
four remote controls.
Remote control unit failure
Make sure that the correct battery
type is being used, and that the
battery is in good condition and inserted correctly. These batteries
have a service life of approximately
two years.
Refer to Section 5: “Radio frequency remote control: batteries”
for the battery changing procedure.
1.3
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: use
The remote control A can be used to
lock or unlock the doors and boot.
Note:
A
It is powered by a battery which must
be replaced (refer to the information on
“Radio frequency remote control: batteries” in Section 5).
With the engine running, the ignition
switched on and in accessories position
(refer to “Ignition switch: vehicles with a
key” in Section 2), the remote control
buttons will be inactive.
2
1
2
Locking the doors
Press locking button 1.
The side indicator lights and hazard
warning lights flash twice to indicate
that the doors have been locked.
If a door or the boot is open or not properly shut, they will lock and unlock in
quick succession and the hazard warning lights and indicator lights will not
flash.
1
3
3
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 3.
Unlocking the doors
Pressing button 2 unlocks the doors
and tailgate.
The side indicator lights and hazard
warning lights flash once to indicate
that the doors have been unlocked.
1.4
Driver’s responsibility when parking or stopping the vehicle
Never leave an animal, child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on
your vehicle, even for a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the electric windows or locking the doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather, please remember that the temperature inside
the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY.
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL UNIT: deadlocking
If the vehicle is equipped with a deadlocking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
1
1
To do this, press button 1 twice in quick
succession.
The hazard warning lights and indicator
lights give two slow flashes and three
quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
1.5
RENAULT CARD: general information (1/2)
1
4
2
3
The RENAULT card is used
for:
RENAULT card operating
range
– locking/unlocking the doors and tailgate (doors, tailgate) and the fuel
filler flap (see the following pages);
– switching on the vehicle lighting remotely (refer to the following pages);
– Automatic closing of electric windows and, depending on the vehicle, of the sunroof; please see the information on “Electric windows” and
“Electric sunroof” in Chapter 3;
– starting the engine; please see the
information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Chapter 2.
This varies according to the surroundings. It is important to make sure when
handling the RENAULT card that you
do not lock or unlock the doors by inadvertently pressing the buttons.
1 Unlocking the doors and tailgate.
2 Locking all doors and tailgate.
Battery life
3 Unlocking/locking the boot.
Make sure that the correct battery type
is being used, and that the battery is in
good condition and inserted correctly.
Its service life is approximately two
years: replace it when the message
“Keycard battery low” appears on the
instrument panel (refer to the information on the “RENAULT card: battery” in
section 5).
4 Switching on the lighting remotely.
1.6
When the battery is flat, you can
still lock/unlock and start your vehicle. Please see the information on
“Locking and unlocking the doors”
in Chapter 1 and “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Chapter 2.
RENAULT CARD: general information (2/2)
4
Advice
Avoid leaving the card in hot, cold or
humid areas.
Do not keep the RENAULT card in
a place where it could be bent or
damaged accidentally, such as in a
back pocket of a garment.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
Distance lighting function
Pressing button 4 switches on the
dipped beam headlights and the interior lighting for approximately 20 seconds. This can be used, for example,
to identify the vehicle from a distance
when parked in a car park.
Note: Pressing button 4 again switches
off the lighting.
Replacement: need for an
additional RENAULT Card
If you lose your RENAULT card or
require another, you can obtain one
from an approved dealer.
If a RENAULT card is replaced, it
will be necessary to take the vehicle and all of its RENAULT cards
to an approved dealer to initialise
the system.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
You may use up to four RENAULT
cards per vehicle.
1.7
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (1/4)
There are two ways to unlock/lock the
vehicle:
– the RENAULT card in “Hands-free”
mode;
– the RENAULT card in remote control mode.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
Do not store the RENAULT card
anywhere it may come into contact with other electronic equipment
(computer, phone, etc.) as this could
hinder its operation.
1.8
1
Using the card in “handsfree” mode
In “hands-free” mode, it is possible to
lock/unlock the vehicle without using
any of the RENAULT card’s buttons,
as long as the card is within the access
zone 1.
Note: It is possible to disable “handsfree” access using the multifunction
screen (please see the equipment instructions).
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (2/4)
“Hands-free” locking using the
sensor 3
4
2
Note: The sensor cannot be used to
lock the vehicle unless the RENAULT
card is within the access zone 1.
3
Special features of the locking
system
“Hands-free” unlocking
Remote “Hands-free” locking
With the RENAULT card in zone 1,
place your hand on a door handle 2: the
vehicle will unlock.
With the RENAULT card on you, and
doors and boot closed, move away
from the vehicle: it will lock automatically as soon as you leave the access
zone.
The hazard warning lights flash once
to indicate that the doors have been unlocked.
Pressing the button 4 unlocks the entire
vehicle and releases the boot.
If you wish to lock your vehicle while the
card is within range, make sure that the
doors and boot are closed and place
your finger over the sensor 3 on the
driver’s door handle. The vehicle will
lock.
Note: The distance at which the vehicle
locks depends on the surroundings.
To indicate that the doors have been
locked, the hazard warning lights
flash once and then light up for approximately four seconds, and a beep
sounds in confirmation.
Having locked the vehicle by pressing
the sensor 3, there is a delay of approximately 3 seconds before it can be unlocked again. During these 3 seconds,
the door handles can be tried to make
sure that the vehicle is locked properly.
If a door is open or not properly closed:
– when locking using the sensor 3,
the vehicle will lock/unlock in quick
succession, but the hazard warning
lights will not flash;
– the vehicle will not lock as you move
away.
1.9
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (3/4)
5
6
7
3
Particular features of the locking
system (continued)
If the RENAULT card has been within
range for approximately 15 minutes,
remote locking is disabled.
The vehicle cannot be locked if the card
is within the zone 7.
If the vehicle is unlocked by pressing
the button on the RENAULT card, but
the doors or boot are not then opened;
remote “hands-free” locking is disabled.
Using the card as a remote
control
Unlocking with the card RENAULT
Press the button 5.
The hazard warning lights flash once
to indicate that the doors have been unlocked.
Locking using the RENAULT card
With the doors and boot closed, press
button 6: the vehicle will lock.
The hazard warning lights will flash
twice to indicate that the vehicle is
locked.
Note: The maximum distance at which
the vehicle locks depends on the surroundings.
Special features
If the a door or the boot is open or not
properly closed, the vehicle cannot be
locked. The vehicle will lock/unlock in
quick succession, but the hazard warning lights will not flash.
The card buttons are deactivated
when the engine is running.
1.10
RENAULT “HANDS-FREE” CARD: usage (4/4)
7
8
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
If, while the engine is running, a door
is opened and closed, and the card is
no longer in the zone 7, the message
Keycard not detected indicates that the
card is not inside the vehicle. This will,
for example, prevent you from driving
away after dropping off a passenger
who has kept the card on them.
The warning disappears when the card
is detected again.
Locking/unlocking only the
boot
Press the button 8 to lock/unlock the
boot only.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.11
RENAULT CARD: deadlocking
1
If the vehicle is equipped with a deadlocking function, this allows you to lock
the opening elements and to prevent
the doors from being unlocked using
the interior handles (for example, by
breaking the window and then trying to
open the door from the inside).
To do this, press button 1 twice in quick
succession.
The hazard warning lights and indicator
lights give two slow flashes and three
quick flashes to indicate locking.
Special note: deadlocking is not possible if the hazard warning lights or the
side lights are lit.
Never use deadlocking if
someone is still inside the
vehicle.
1.12
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (1/3)
If the remote control or,
depending on the vehicle, the
RENAULT card does not work
2
1
In some cases, the radio frequency
remote control or the RENAULT card
may not work:
– RENAULT card/radio frequency
remote control battery worn or run
flat, vehicle battery flat, etc.
– use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
It is then possible:
– depending on the vehicle, use the
radio frequency remote control or
the emergency key integrated in the
card to unlock the front left-hand
door;
– to lock each of the doors manually;
– to use the interior door locking/unlocking control (refer to the following
pages).
A
The card’s built-in key
The built-in key 2 is used to lock or
unlock the front left-hand door if the
RENAULT card is not working.
Access with key 2
Slide the rear casing 1 downwards
while pressing on zone A.
1.13
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (2/3)
4
B
6
2
3
Using the key integrated in the
RENAULT card
– Insert the tip of the key 2 into the
notch 3 at the bottom of the cover B
on the front left-hand door;
– Move it upwards to remove the
cover B;
– Insert the key 2 into the lock and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
Once you are inside the vehicle, put the
key back in its casing in the RENAULT
card.
1.14
5
Vehicles with key/remote
control
Using the key
Insert the key 5 into the lock 4 and lock
or unlock the front left-hand door.
Locking the doors manually
Turn screw 6 with the door open (using
the end of the key) and close the door.
This means that the doors are then
locked from the outside.
The doors may then only be opened
from the inside or by using the key in
the front left-hand door.
LOCKING, UNLOCKING THE DOORS (3/3)
Locking the opening
elements without the
RENAULT card or the key
For example, in the event of a discharged battery or the RENAULT card
or key temporarily not working, etc.
7
With the engine switched off and a
door or tailgate open, press and hold
switch 7 for more than five seconds.
When the door is closed, all the doors
and the tailgate will be locked.
Interior locking/unlocking
door control
Switch 7 controls the doors, the boot
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
If a door or the tailgate is open or not
closed properly, the doors and tailgate
lock/unlock quickly.
If transporting an object with the tailgate open, you can still lock the doors:
with the engine stopped, press and
hold switch 7 for more than five seconds to lock the other doors.
Unlocking the vehicle from the outside
is only possible with the RENAULT card
in the vehicle’s access zone or using
the key.
Door and tailgate status
indicator
When the ignition is on, the indicator
light integrated in switch 7 informs you
of the status of the doors and tailgate:
– indicator light on, the doors and tailgate are locked;
– indicator light off, the doors and tailgate are unlocked.
When you lock the doors from the outside, the indicator light remains lit for a
moment, and then goes out.
Never leave your vehicle
with the key or RENAULT
card inside.
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
1.15
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (1/3)
Lights-on reminder buzzer
2
1
Opening the doors from the
outside
With the doors unlocked or RENAULT
card on you, hold handle 1 and pull it
towards you.
As a safety precaution,
the doors should only be
opened or closed when the
vehicle is stationary.
1.16
Opening from the inside
Pull on the handle 2.
If you have switched off the ignition
and left the lights switched on, a reminder buzzer will sound when a door is
opened while the light stalk is not in position AUTO.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (2/3)
4
Once the vehicle reaches a speed of
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), a
warning light indicates if the door(s) or
luggage compartment are open or improperly closed, along with the message “Boot open” or “Door open” and a
beep will sound for around 40 seconds
or until the door/luggage compartment
is closed.
3
Door/tailgate open buzzer
At a standstill, warning light 3 lights
up on the instrument panel alongside
warning light 4, indicating the opening
element(s) (door, boot) open or incorrectly closed.
1.17
OPENING AND CLOSING THE DOORS (3/3)
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
5
Child safety
Move lever 5 and check from the inside
that the doors are securely locked, to
prevent the rear doors being opened
from the inside.
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
1.18
AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING
Activating/deactivating the
function
1
2
To switch it on: with the vehicle at a
standstill and the engine running, press
switch 2 until a beep sounds.
To deactivate: with the vehicle at a
standstill and the engine running, press
switch 2 until two beeps sound.
You can also activate/deactivate the
function from the menu on the multifunction screen 1 (refer to the information on the “Vehicle settings customisation menu” section 1, “Auto door locking
while driving” function).
Operating faults
If you experience an operating fault (no
automatic locking, the indicator light incorporated in switch 2 does not light up
when trying to lock the doors and boot,
etc.), make sure that locking has not
been deactivated by mistake and check
that the doors and boot are properly
closed. If they are correctly locked and
the fault is still present, contact an authorised dealer.
Operating principle
After the vehicle is started, the system
automatically locks the doors when you
are driving at approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) and over.
The door can be unlocked:
– by pressing central door unlocking
switch 2.
– at a standstill, by opening a front
door from inside the vehicle.
Note: if a door is opened or closed, it
will automatically lock again when the
vehicle reaches a speed of 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Driver’s responsibility
If you decide to keep the
doors locked when you are
driving, remember that it
may be more difficult for those assisting you to gain access to the
passenger compartment in the
event of an emergency.
1.19
FRONT HEADRESTS
To adjust the angle of the
headrest
A
1
3
2
Depending on the vehicle, tilt section A
towards or away from you to the required position
To remove the headrest
Raise the headrest to its highest position (tilt the seatback backwards if
necessary). Press button 2 and lift the
headrest to release it.
To refit the headrest
To raise the headrest
Pull the headrest upwards to the desired height. Check that the bonnet is
correctly locked.
To lower the headrest
Press button 2 and guide the headrest
down to the desired height. Check that
the bonnet is correctly locked.
1.20
Check that the headrest rods are
clean 1. The rod with a notch should be
inserted into the slot 3 fitted with a locking button 2. Insert the headrest rods
into the holes (tilt the seatback backwards if necessary). Press the 2 button
and push in the headrest as far as it will
go, then adjust it to the desired height.
Check that each rod 1 on the seatback
is securely locked.
The headrest is an important safety component:
ensure that it is in place and
in the correct position. The
distance between your head and the
headrest and the distance between
the head and section A should be
as small as possible.
FRONT SEATS (1/2)
2
1
5
3
4
Settings
To move the seat forwards or back
Lift handle 1 to release. Release the
handle at the desired position and
make sure that it is locked.
To raise or lower the seat base
Move lever 2 as many times as necessary upwards or downwards.
To tilt the seatback
Lift handle 3 and tilt the seatback to the
desired position. Release the handle at
the desired position and make sure that
it is locked.
To adjust the seat’s lumbar position
Depending on the vehicle:
– move the switch 4 forwards, backwards, up or down;
or
– lower the handle 5 to increase the
support and lift it to decrease it.
For safety reasons, make
these adjustments only
when the vehicle is stationary.
We would advise you not to recline
the seatbacks too far to ensure that
the effectiveness of the seat belts is
not reduced.
Nothing should be placed on the
floor (area in front of driver) as such
objects may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
1.21
FRONT SEATS (2/2)
Massage
Driver
ON
Massage
Tonic
Relaxing
Lumbar
Intensity
8
Speed
7
6
Functions
Massage
From the multifunction screen, you can
access the driver’s seat massage function. On equipped vehicles, the switch 6
permits direct access to the “Massage”
menu on the multifunction screen.
To activate the function:
– select the menu “Vehicle”, “Seats”
then “Massage”;
– select the type of massage (Tonic,
Relaxing or Lumbar);
1.22
– adjust the intensity (+ or -);
Heated seats
– adjust the speed (+ or -);
With the ignition on:
– reset the selected settings. Press 7
then “Reset”;
– pressing the switch 8 on the required
seat for the first time activates the
heating system at maximum power.
Both integrated switch warning lights
come on;
– activate/deactivate the massage
seat (ON or OFF).
Note: the mode selected in the “MultiSense” menu may affect the massage
configuration (please refer to the information in “Multi-Sense” in Section 3).
Please refer to the multimedia equipment instructions for further information
– a second press decreases the heating to minimum power. One integrated warning light comes on;
– pressing for the third time turns the
heating off.
SEAT BELTS (1/4)
Always wear your seat belt when travelling in your vehicle. You must also
comply with the legislation of the particular country you are in.
Before starting, first adjust your driving position, then ask all occupants
to adjust their seat belts to ensure
optimum protection.
Adjusting your driving
position
Incorrectly adjusted or
twisted seat belts may
cause injuries in the event
of an accident.
Use one seat belt per person,
whether child or adult.
Even pregnant women should wear
a seat belt. In this case, ensure that
the lap belt is not exerting too much
pressure on the abdomen, but do
not allow any slack.
– Sit well back in your seat (having
first removed your coat or jacket).
This is essential to ensure your back
is positioned correctly;
– adjust the distance between the
seat and the pedals. Your seat
should be as far back as possible
while still allowing you to depress
the clutch pedal fully. The seatback
should be adjusted so that your arms
are slightly bent when you hold the
steering wheel;
– adjust the position of your headrest. For the maximum safety, your
head must be as close as possible to
the headrest;
– adjust the height of the seat. This
adjustment allows you to select the
seat position which offers you the
best possible view;
– adjust the position of the steering
wheel.
1
2
Adjusting the seat belts
Sit with your back firmly against the
seatback.
Shoulder strap 1 should be as close as
possible to the base of the neck but not
on it.
Lap belt 2 should be worn flat over the
thighs and against the pelvis.
The belt should be worn so that it is
as close as possible to your body, i.e.:
avoid wearing heavy clothing or keeping bulky objects under the belts, etc.
1.23
SEAT BELTS (2/4)
Driver’s seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehicle, front passenger seat belt reminder
ß
1
3
5
4
5
This lights up on the central display
when starting the engine then, if the
driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt
(if this seat is occupied) is not fastened
and the vehicle has reached approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), it flashes and
a bleep sounds for around 120 seconds.
Rear seat belt reminder
Unwind the belt slowly and smoothly
and ensure that buckle 3 locks into
catch 5 (check that it is locked by pulling on buckle 3).
The warning light
lights up on
the central display accompanied, depending on the vehicle, by a message
indicating the number of seat belts
buckled (for approximately 30 seconds)
or the graphic 6.
In all cases, these messages appear
with each:
– starting the vehicle;
– opening a door;
– fastening or unfastening of a rear
seat belt (for this case, the information is accompanied by a beep lasting approximately 30 seconds).
If your seat belt is completely jammed,
pull slowly, but firmly, so that just over
3 cm unwinds. Allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
If there is still a problem, contact an approved dealer.
1.24
6
Note: an object placed on the passenger seat base may activate the warning
light in some cases.
Locking
If the belt jams, allow it to return slightly
before attempting to unwind it again.
6
ß
Check that the rear passengers are
wearing seat belts and that the number
of seat belts shown as fastened corresponds to the number of rear seat
places occupied.
On the graphic 6:
– marker in green: seat belt fastened;
– marker in red: seat belt unfastened.
Unfastening
Press button 4 and the seat belt will be
rewound by the inertia reel. Guide the
belt.
SEAT BELTS (3/4)
7
8
8
Adjusting the height of the
front seat belts
Use button 7 to adjust the seat belt
height so that the shoulder strap is worn
as shown previously. Press the button 7
and raise or lower the seat belt. Make
sure that the seat belt is locked in position correctly after you have adjusted it.
Rear seat belts 8
The belts are locked, unlocked and
adjusted in the same way as the front
belts.
moved.
Check that the rear seat
belts are positioned and
operating correctly each
time the rear bench seat is
1.25
SEAT BELTS (4/4)
The following information applies to the vehicle’s front and rear seat belts.
– No modification may be made to the component parts of the originally fitted restraint system: seat belts, seats and
their mountings. For special operations (e.g. fitting child seats), contact an authorised dealer.
– Do not use devices which allow any slack in the belts (e.g. clothes pegs, clips, etc.): a seat belt which is worn too
loosely may cause injury in the event of an accident.
– Never wear the shoulder strap under your arm or behind your back.
– Never use the same belt for more than one person and never hold a baby or child on your lap with your seat belt around
them.
– The belt should never be twisted.
– Following an accident, have the seat belts checked and replaced if necessary. Always replace your seat belts as soon as
they show any signs of wear.
– When positioning the rear bench seat, make sure that the seat belt is correctly positioned so that it can be used properly.
– Make sure that the buckle is inserted into the appropriate catch.
– Ensure that no objects are placed in the area around the seat belt catch as they could prevent it from being properly secured.
– Make sure the seat belt catch is properly positioned (it should not be hidden away, crushed or flattened by people or objects).
1.26
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (1/4)
Depending on the vehicle, they are
composed of:
– seat belt inertia reel pretensioners;
– Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
– No operation whatsoever is permitted on any part of
the system (pretensioners, air
bags, computers, wiring) and the
system components must not
be reused on any other vehicle,
even if identical.
– central seat belt pretensioners;
– chest-level load limiter;
– air bags for driver and front passenger.
These systems are designed to act independently or together when the vehicle is subjected to a frontal impact.
Depending on the severity of the
impact, the system can trigger:
– seat belt locking;
– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner
(which engages to correct seat belt
slack);
– the lap belt pretensioners to hold the
occupant in his seat;
– the front airbag.
Pretensioners
– To avoid incorrect triggering of
the system which may cause
injury, only qualified personnel
from an approved Dealer may
work on the pretensioner and air
bag system.
The pretensioners hold the seat belt
against the body, holding the occupant
more securely against the seat, thus increasing the seat belt’s efficiency.
– The electric trigger system may
only be tested by a specially
trained technician using special
equipment.
In the event of a severe frontal impact
and if the ignition is switched on, the
system may engage the following depending on the force of the impact:
– When the vehicle is scrapped,
contact an approved Dealer for
disposal of the pretensioner and
air bag gas generators.
1
2
– the seat belt inertia reel pretensioner 1 which instantly retracts the
seat belt;
– the lap pretensioner 2 on the front
seats.
1.27
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (2/4)
Load limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
airbags for driver and
passenger
Fitted to the driver and passenger side.
The presence of this equipment is indicated by the word “Air bag” on the
steering wheel and dashboard (air bag
zone A) and, depending on the vehicle,
a symbol on the lower section of the
windscreen.
A
Each air bag system consists of:
– an air bag and gas generator fitted
on the steering wheel for the driver
and in the dashboard for the front
passenger;
– an electronic unit for system monitoring which controls the gas generator
electrical trigger system;
– remote sensors;
– a single warning light
instrument panel.
1.28
å
on the
The air bag system uses
pyrotechnic principles. This
explains why, when the air
bag inflates, it will generate heat, produce smoke (this does
not mean that a fire is about to start)
and make a noise upon detonation.
In a situation where an air bag is
required, it will inflate immediately
and this may cause some minor, superficial grazing to the skin or other
problems.
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (3/4)
Operating faults
å
This warning light comes on
when the engine is started and then
goes out after approximately three seconds.
If it does not come on when the ignition
is switched on or if it stays on, there is a
fault in the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
Your protection will be reduced until this
fault is rectified.
Operation
This system is only operational when
the ignition is switched on.
In a severe frontal impact, the air bags
inflate rapidly, cushioning the impact
of the driver’s head and chest against
the steering wheel and of the front passenger against the dashboard. The air
bags then deflate immediately so that
the passengers are not in any way hindered from leaving the vehicle.
1.29
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE FRONT SEAT BELTS (4/4)
All of the warnings below are given so that the air bag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the air bag inflates.
Warnings concerning the driver’s air bag
– Do not modify the steering wheel or the steering wheel boss.
– Do not cover the steering wheel boss under any circumstances.
– Do not attach any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the steering wheel boss.
– The steering wheel must not be removed (except by qualified personnel from our Network).
– Do not sit too close to the steering wheel when driving: Sit with your arms slightly bent (see the information on “Adjusting
your driving position” in Section 1). This will allow sufficient space for the air bag to deploy correctly and to be fully effective.
Warnings concerning the passenger air bag
– Do not attach or glue any objects (badge, logo, clock, telephone holder, etc.) to the dashboard on or near the air bag.
– Do not place anything between the dashboard and the passenger (pet, umbrella, walking stick, parcels, etc.).
– The passenger must not put his or her feet on the dashboard or seat as there is a risk that serious injuries may be sustained.
In general, parts of the body should be kept away from the dashboard (knees, hands, head, etc.)
– The devices in addition to the front passenger seat belt should be reactivated as soon as a child seat is removed, to ensure
the protection of the passenger in the event of an impact.
A REAR-FACING CHILD SEAT MUST NOT BE FITTED TO THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT UNLESS
THE ADDITIONAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, I.E. THE PASSENGER AIR BAG, ARE DEACTIVATED.
(refer to the information on “Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag” in Section 1)
1.30
METHODS OF RESTRAINT IN ADDITION TO THE REAR SEAT BELTS
Force limiter
Above a certain severity of impact, this
mechanism is used to limit the force of
the belt against the body so that it is at
an acceptable level.
– Have the entire restraint
system checked following
an accident.
– No operation whatsoever
is permitted on any part of the
system (air bags, electronic control units, wiring) and the system
components must not be reused
on any other vehicle, even if identical.
– Only qualified personnel from
our Network may work on the air
bags; otherwise the system may
trigger accidentally and cause
injury.
1.31
SIDE PROTECTION DEVICES
Side air bags
These air bags are fitted to the front
seats and are activated at the sides of
the seats (door side) to protect the occupants in the event of a severe side
impact.
Curtain air bags
These are airbags fitted along the sides
of the vehicle in the ceiling which trigger
along the front and rear door side windows to protect the passengers in case
of a severe side impact.
Warning concerning the side air bag
– Fitting seat covers: seats equipped with an air bag require covers
specifically designed for your vehicle. Contact an approved Dealer to find
out if these covers are available. The use of any covers other than those
designed for your vehicle (including those designed for another vehicle) may
affect the operation of the air bags and reduce your protection.
– Do not place any accessories, objects or even pets between the seatback, the
door and the internal fittings. Do not cover the seatback with any items such as
clothes or accessories. This may prevent the air bag from operating correctly
or cause injury when the air bag is deployed.
Depending on the vehicle, a marking on the windscreen informs you
of the presence of additional means
of restraint (airbags, pretensioners,
etc.) in the passenger compartment.
1.32
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on the seat or internal
fittings, except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.
ADDITIONAL METHODS OF RESTRAINT
All of the warnings below are given so that the air bag is not obstructed in any way when it is inflated and also to prevent
the risk of serious injuries caused by items which may be dislodged when the air bag inflates.
The air bag is designed to complement the action of the seat belt. Both the air bags and seat belts are integral parts of
the same protection system. It is therefore essential to wear seat belts at all times. If seat belts are not worn, the occupants are exposed to the risk of serious injury in the event of an accident. It may also increase the risk of minor superficial injuries occurring when the air bag is deployed, although such minor injuries are always possible with air bags.
If the vehicle should overturn or suffer a rear impact, however severe, the pretensioners and air bags are not always triggered.
Shocks to the underbody of the vehicle, e.g. from pavements, potholes or stones, can all trigger these systems.
– No work or modification whatsoever may be carried out on any part of the air bag system (air bags, pretensioners, computer, wiring harness, etc.), except by qualified personnel from an approved dealer.
– To ensure that the system is in good working order and to avoid accidental triggering of the system which may cause injury,
only qualified Network personnel may work on the air bag system.
– As a safety precaution, have the air bag system checked if your vehicle has been involved in an accident, or is stolen or
broken into.
– When selling or lending the vehicle, inform the user of these points and hand over this driver’s handbook with the vehicle.
– When scrapping your vehicle, contact your approved dealer for disposal of the gas generator(s).
1.33
CHILD SAFETY: General information (1/2)
Carrying children
Children, and adults, must be correctly
seated and strapped in for all journeys.
The children being carried in your vehicle are your responsibility.
A child is not a miniature adult. Children
are at risk of specific injuries as their
muscles and bones have not yet finished growing. The seat belt alone
would not provide suitable protection.
Use an approved child seat and ensure
you use it correctly.
To prevent the doors being
opened, use the “Child
safety” device (refer to the
information on “Opening
and closing the doors” in Section 1).
1.34
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone on your vehicle, even for
a short time.
A collision at 30 mph
(50 km/h) is the same as falling a distance of 10 metres.
Transporting a child without
a restraint is the equivalent of allowing him or her to play on a fourthfloor balcony without railings.
Never travel with a child held in your
arms. In the event of an accident,
you will not be able to keep hold of
the child, even if you yourself are
wearing a seat belt.
If your vehicle has been involved in
a road accident, replace the child
seat and have the seat belts and
ISOFIX anchorage points checked.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or by locking the
doors.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
CHILD SAFETY: General information (2/2)
Using a child seat
The level of protection offered by the
child seat depends on its ability to restrain your child and on its installation.
Incorrect installation compromises the
protection it offers the child in the event
of harsh braking or an impact.
Before purchasing a child seat, check
that it complies with the regulations for
the country you are in and that it can
be fitted in your vehicle. Consult an approved dealer to find out which seats
are recommended for your vehicle.
Before fitting a child seat, read the
manual and respect its instructions. If
you experience any difficulties during
installation, contact the manufacturer
of the equipment. Keep the instructions
with the seat.
Set a good example by always fastening your seat belt and teaching
your child:
– to strap themselves in correctly;
– to always get in and out of the car
at the kerb, away from busy traffic.
Do not use a second-hand child
seat or one without an instruction
manual.
Check that there are no objects in
the vicinity of the child seat which
could impede its operation.
Never leave a child unattended in the vehicle.
Check that your child is
always strapped in and that
the belt or safety harness used is
correctly set and adjusted. Avoid
wearing bulky clothing which could
cause the belts to slacken.
Never let your child put their head or
arms out of the window.
Check that the child is in the correct
position for the entire journey, especially if asleep.
1.35
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat
Rear-facing child seats
A baby’s head is, proportionally, heavier
than that of an adult and its neck is very
fragile. Transport the child in this position for as long as possible (until the
age of 2 at the very least). It supports
both the head and the neck.
Choose a bucket type seat for best side
protection and change it as soon as the
child’s head is higher than the shell.
1.36
Forward-facing child seats
The child’s head and abdomen need to
be protected as a priority. A forward-facing child seat which is firmly attached to
the vehicle will reduce the risk of impact
to the head. Ensure your child travels in
a forward-facing seat with a harness for
as long as their size permits.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
Booster cushions
From 15 kg or 4 years, the child can
travel using a booster seat, which will
enable the seat belt to be adapted to
suit his/her size and shape. The booster seat cushion must be fitted with
guides to position the seat belt on the
child’s thighs rather than the stomach.
It is recommended that you use a seatback fitted with a belt strap guide which
can be adjusted in terms of height to
position the seat belt in the centre of the
shoulder. It must never rest on the neck
or on the arm.
Choose a bucket type seat for optimum
side protection.
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (1/3)
There are two ways of attaching child
seats: via the seat belt or using the
ISOFIX system.
Attachment via the seat belt
The seat belt must be adjusted to
ensure that it is effective in the event of
harsh braking or an impact.
Ensure that the strap paths indicated
by the child seat manufacturer are respected.
Always check that the seat belt is correctly fastened by pulling it up, then
pulling it out fully whilst pressing on the
child seat.
Check that the seat is correctly held by
moving it from side to side and back
to front: the seat should remain firmly
fixed.
Check that the child seat has not been
installed at an angle and that it is not
resting against a window.
Do not use the child seat
if it may unfasten the seat
belt restraining it: the base
of the seat must not rest on
the buckle and/or catch of the seat
belt.
The seat belt must never
be twisted or the tension
relieved. Never pass the
shoulder strap under the
arm or behind the back.
Check that the seat belt has not
been damaged by sharp edges.
If the seat belt does not operate normally, it will not protect the child.
Consult an approved dealer. Do not
use this seat until the seat belt has
been repaired.
1.37
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (2/3)
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system
Approved child seats ISOFIX are standardised in accordance with current regulations if any of the four cases below
applies:
Attach the child seat with the ISOFIX
locks, if these are provided. The ISOFIX
system allows quick, easy, safe fitting.
The ISOFIX system consists of 2 rings
and, in some cases, a third ring.
– ISOFIX universal 3-point forwardfacing seat;
– ISOFIX semi-universal 2-point seat;
– Specific;
– i-Size Which has:
– either a belt which attaches to the
third ring of the seat concerned;
– or a stay that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved seat i-Size, the role of
which is to prevent the child seat
from moving in the event of a collision.
In the latter three cases check that your
child seat can be installed by consulting
the list of compatible vehicles.
No modifications may be
made to the component
parts of the restraint system
(ISOFIX seat belts, seats
and their mountings) originally fitted.
Before using an ISOFIX
child seat that you purchased for another vehicle,
check that its installation is
authorised. Consult the list of vehicles which can be fitted with the
seat from the equipment manufacturer.
1.38
CHILD SAFETY: choosing a child seat mounting (3/3)
The rings are located on the rear seatbacks and indicated by the symbol .
In all cases, attach the strap hook to the
corresponding ring 3 or 4 and place the
seat in the desired position.
1
Pull the belt so that the back of the child
seat comes into contact with the back
of the vehicle seat.
2
3
Attachment using the ISOFIX
system (continued)
The two rings 1 are located between
the seatback and the seat base of the
seat and are identified by a marking.
To ensure your child seat can be easily
fitted and locked on the rings 1, use
access guides 2 on the child seat.
4
The third ring 3 or 4 is used to attach
the upper strap on some seats ISOFIX.
The ISOFIX anchorage points have been exclusively designed for child
seats with the ISOFIX system. Never fit a different type of child seat, seat
belt or other objects to these anchorage points. Check that nothing is obstructing the anchorage points.
If your vehicle has been involved in a road accident, have the ISOFIX anchorage
points checked and replace your child seat.
Check that the seatback
of the forward-facing child
seat is in contact with the
seatback of the vehicle
seat. In this case, the child seat may
not always rest on the seat base of
the vehicle seat.
The child seat strap must
be attached to the corresponding ring.
Do not use any other
mounting point.
1.39
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (1/2)
Some seats are not suitable for fitting
child seats. The diagram on the following page shows you how to attach a
child seat.
The types of child seat indicated may
not be available. Before using a different child seat, check with the manufacturer that it can be fitted.
In the front seat
Fit the child seat in a rear
seat wherever possible.
Make sure that the child
seat or the child’s feet do
not prevent the front seat from locking correctly. Refer to the information on the “Front seat” in Section 1.
Check that when installing the child
seat in the vehicle it is not at risk of
coming loose from its base.
If you have to remove the headrest,
check that it is correctly stored so
that it does not come loose under
harsh braking or impact.
Always attach the child seat to the
vehicle even if it is not in use so that
it does not come loose under harsh
braking or impact.
1.40
The laws concerning children travelling in the front passenger seat differ in
every country. Consult the legislation in
force and follow the indications on the
diagram on the following page.
After installing the child seat, if necessary, the seat may be advanced (so as
to leave enough space in the rear seats
for passengers or other child seats).
For a rear-facing child seat, do not let
it touch the dashboard or move it to the
furthest forward position.
Do not change other settings after installing the child seat.
Before fitting a child seat in this seat (if
authorised):
– lower the seat belt as far as possible;
– move the seat as far back as possible;
– gently tilt the seatback away from
vertical (approximately 25°);
– on equipped vehicles, raise the seat
base as far as possible.
In all situations, reinsert the headrest to
its full extent so that it does not interfere
with the child seat (see the information
on “Front headrests” in Section 1);
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: before
fitting a rear-facing child
seat to this seat, check
that the air bag has been deactivated (refer to the information on
“Child safety: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag” in
Section 1).
CHILD SAFETY: fitting a child seat, general information (2/2)
In the rear seat
A carrycot can be installed across the
vehicle and will take up at least two
seats. Position the child with his or her
feet nearest the door.
Move the front seat as far forward as
possible to install a rear-facing child
seat, then move back the seat in front
as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
For the safety of a child in the facing
forwards, move the seat as far back as
possible and move the seat in front of
the child forward, remembering to move
the seatback forwards to avoid contact
between the seat and the child’s legs.
Always remove the headrest from the
rear seat used for the child seat (see
“Rear headrests” in Section 3). If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far
back as possible. This must be done
before fitting the child seat.
Check that the child seat is resting
against the back of the vehicle seat.
A child seat with support
struts must never be installed on the rear centre
seat. RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY.
When fitting a child seat
(Group 2 or 3 booster seat),
check that the seat belts operate (wind) correctly: refer
to Section 1 “Rear seat belts”. If
necessary, adjust the position of the
vehicle seat.
Ensure that the child seat
or the child’s feet do not
prevent the front seat from
locking correctly. Refer to
the information on the “Front seat”
in Section 1 or “Rear seat operation”
in Section 3.
1.41
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (1/3)
The table below summarises the information already shown in the diagram on the following pages, to ensure the applicable regulations are respected.
Front passenger
seat (1)
Rear side seats
Rear centre seat
X
U (2)
X
Rear-facing shell
seat
< 10 kg and < 13 kg
Groups 0 or 0 +
U (5)
U (3)
U (3)
Shell seat/rear-facing
seat
< 13 kg and 9 to 18 kg
Groups 0+ and 1
U (5)
U (3)
U (3)
Type of child seat
Weight of the child
Carrycot
fitted
across the vehicle
< 10 kg
Group 0
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg
X
U (4)
U (4)
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and 22 to
36 kg
X
U (4)
X
(1) RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY: Before installing a child seat on the front passenger seat, check that
the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety: front passenger airbag deactivation and activation” in
Section 1).
1.42
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (2/3)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats of this type.
U = Seat which allows a child seat with “Universal” approval to be installed using a seat belt; check that it can be fitted.
(2) A carrycot can be installed across the vehicle and will take up at least two seats. Position the child with his or her feet nearest
the door.
(3) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rearfacing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(4) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
(5) Raise the seat to the maximum and position it as far back as possible, tilting the seatback slightly (approximately 25°).
1.43
CHILD SEATS: attachment by seat belt (3/3)
Fitting diagram
³
Check the status of the airbag
before fitting a child seat or allowing a
passenger to use the seat.
²
Seat not suitable for fitting
child seats.
Child seat attached using the belt
¬
Seat which allows a child seat
with “Universal” approval to be attached
by a seat belt.
RISK OF DEATH OR
SERIOUS INJURY: Before
installing a child seat on the
front passenger seat, check
that the airbag has been deactivated (please refer to “Child safety:
front passenger airbag deactivation
and activation” in Section 1).
1.44
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (1/3)
Fitting diagram
Child seat fitted using the ISOFIX
mounting
±
Seat which allows an ISOFIX
child seat to be fitted.
The rear seats are fitted with
an anchorage point which allows a
forward-facing ISOFIX child seat with
universal approval to be attached. The
anchorage points are located on the
backs of the rear seats.
The size of the ISOFIX child seat is indicated by a letter:
– A, B and B1: for forward-facing seats
in group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
²
Seat which does not allow a
child seat to be fitted.
– C and D: shell seat or rear-facing
seats in group 0+ (less than 13 kg)
or group 1 (9 to 18 kg);
– E: rear-facing shell seats in group 0
(less than 10 kg) or 0+ (less than
13 kg);
– F and G: cots in group 0 (less than
10 kg).
Using a child safety system
which is not approved for
this vehicle will not correctly
protect the baby or child.
They risk serious or even fatal injury.
1.45
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (2/3)
The table below summarises the information already shown on the diagram on the previous pages, to ensure the regulations in force are respected.
Type of child seat
Weight of
the child
Carrycot fitted across
the vehicle
< 10 kg
Group 0
Rear-facing
seat
Groups 0 or 0 +
shell
< 10 kg and
< 13 kg
Shell seat/rear-facing
< 13 kg and 9 to
seat
18 kg
Groups 0+ and 1
Forward-facing seat
Group 1
9 to 18 kg
Booster seat
Groups 2 and 3
15 to 25 kg and
22 to 36 kg
Seat i-Size
1.46
Seat size ISOFIX
Front passenger
seat
Rear side seats
Rear centre seat
F, G
X
X
X
E
X
IL (1)
X
C, D
X
IL (1)
X
A, B, B1
X
IUF - IL (2)
X
X
IUF - IL (2)
X
X
i-U
X
CHILD SEATS: attachment using the isofix system (3/3)
X = Seat not suitable for fitting child seats ISOFIX.
IUF/IL = On equipped vehicles, seat which allows an approved “Universal/semi-universal” or “vehicle specific” child seat to be attached using the ISOFIX system; check that it can be fitted.
i-U = Suitable for the i-Size restraint devices in the “universal” forward-facing and backward-facing category.
(1) If necessary, position the vehicle seat as far back as possible. Move the front seat as far forward as possible to install a rearfacing child seat, then move back the seat in front as far as it will go, although without allowing it to come into contact with the
child seat.
(2) In all situations, remove the rear headrest of the seat on which the child seat is positioned. This must be done before fitting the
child seat. Please refer to the information on the “Rear headrests” in Section 3. Move the seat in front of the child forwards,
move the seatback forward to avoid contact between the seat and the child’s legs.
1.47
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (1/3)
The front passenger air bag
must only be deactivated or
activated when the vehicle
is stationary.
2
If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights
å
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the air bag in accordance
with the lock position.
1
Front passenger air bag
deactivation
You must deactivate certain devices
in addition to the front passenger seat
belt before fitting a child seat in the front
passenger seat.
To deactivate the air bag: when the
vehicle is stationary, push and turn
lock 1 to the OFF position.
With the ignition on, you must check
that the warning light
display 2.
¹
is lit on the
This light remains permanently lit to
let you know that you can fit a child
seat.
1.48
and © will come on.
DANGER
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the position
of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER
fit a restraint system for a rear-facing child in a seat protected by an
ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This
can cause the CHILD’S DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY.
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (2/3)
A
A
3
DANGER
The markings on the dashboard and
labels A on each side of the passenger sun visor 3 (example: label shown
above) remind you of these instructions.
Since operation of the front
passenger airbag is not
compatible with the position
of a rear-facing child seat, NEVER
fit a restraint system for a rear-facing child in a seat protected by an
ACTIVATED front AIRBAG. This
can cause the CHILD’S DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY.
1.49
CHILD SAFETY: deactivating/activating the front passenger air bag (3/3)
Operating faults
2
It is forbidden to fit a rear-facing child
seat to the front passenger seat if the
airbag activation/deactivation system is
faulty.
Allowing any other passenger to sit in
that seat is not recommended.
Contact your approved dealer as soon
as possible.
1
Activation of the front
passenger air bag
You should reactivate the air bag as
soon as you remove the child seat from
the front passenger seat to ensure the
protection of the front passenger in the
event of an impact.
To reactivate the airbags : with the
vehicle at a standstill, and the ignition off, push and turn lock 1 to the ON
position.
With the ignition switched on, you must
check that the warning light
The front passenger air bag
must only be deactivated or
activated when the vehicle
is stationary.
]
is
out and that the warning light
comes on the display 2 after each startup for around 60 seconds.
The front passenger seat belt additional
restraint systems are activated.
If it is interfered with when the vehicle is being driven, indicator lights
å
and © will come on.
Switch the ignition off then on again
to reset the air bag in accordance
with the lock position.
1.50
AUDIBLE AND VISUAL SIGNALS
Direction indicators
Move stalk 1 parallel to the steering
wheel and in the direction you are going
to turn it.
1
2
One-touch mode
A
Horn
Press the steering wheel boss A to activate the horn.
Headlight flasher
Pull stalk 1 towards you to flash the
headlights.
When driving, it is possible that the
steering wheel may not be turned sufficiently to return the stalk automatically
to its starting position.
In this case, briefly turn stalk 1 to the intermediate position, then release it: the
stalk returns to its original point and the
indicator light flashes three times.
é
Hazard warning lights
Press switch 2. This switch activates all four direction indicators and
the side indicator lights simultaneously.
It must only be used in an emergency to
warn drivers of other vehicles that you
have had to stop in an area where stopping is prohibited or unexpected or that
you are obliged to drive under special
conditions.
Depending on the vehicle, the hazard
warning lights may come on automatically under heavy deceleration. You can
switch them off by pressing switch 2.
1.51
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
1
2
3
28
4
5 6 7
25 24 23 22
8
21
1
9 10 2 11 1
16
20
19
27
26
1.52
18
17
12
15 14
13
2
1
DRIVER’S POSITION, LEFT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
11 Multifunction screen controls:
– screen activation/deactivation;
– volume;
– welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
– settings.
18 Cruise control/speed limiter main
control.
21 Gearstick.
4 Driver Airbag and horn location.
12 Switches for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
5 Instrument panel.
13 Passenger Airbag location.
6 Head-up display.
14 Glove compartment
15 Controls for:
– front seat heating;
– activation/deactivation, depending on the vehicle, of the ECO or
RS Drive mode;
– activation/deactivation of the
parking distance control system;
– activation/deactivation of the Stop
and Start function;
– lane departure warning.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Stalk for:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– rear fog lights.
7 Controls for:
– on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu,
– remote radio and navigation
system.
8 Steering column stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
9 Heating or air conditioning controls.
16 Accessories and multimedia sockets.
17 Storage compartment/cup holder.
19 Assisted parking brake control.
20 Multi-Sense control.
22 Engine start/stop button (vehicles
with RENAULT card)
23 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
24 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach
25 Cruise control/speed limiter and
adaptive cruise control controls.
26 Handbrake.
27 Bonnet release control.
28 Controls for:
– headlight beam height remote adjustment;
– lighting rheostat for control instruments;
– steering wheel heating control.
10 Multifunction touch-screen.
1.53
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (1/2)
1
3
2
4
25
27
5
1
6
2
7
1
24
18
23
19
22
26
1.54
21
20
8
9
17
10 11
16
12 13 2
15
1
14
DRIVING POSITION: RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (2/2)
The equipment fitted, described below, DEPENDS ON THE VERSION AND COUNTRY.
1 Air vent.
2 Demister outlet.
3 Passenger Airbag location.
4 Controls for:
– front seat heating;
– activation/deactivation, depending on the vehicle, of the ECO or
RS Drive mode;
– activation/deactivation of the
parking distance control system;
– activation/deactivation of the Stop
and Start function;
– lane departure warning.
5 Heating or air conditioning controls.
6 Multifunction touch-screen.
7 Multifunction screen controls:
– screen activation/deactivation;
– volume;
– welcome menu;
– driving aids menu;
– settings.
8 Stalk:
– direction indicator lights;
– exterior lights;
– rear fog lights.
15 Ignition switch (vehicles with key).
9 Cruise control/speed limiter and
adaptive cruise control controls.
17 Engine start/stop button (vehicles
with RENAULT card).
10 Instrument panel.
11 Driver Airbag and horn location.
12 Controls for:
– on-board computer information
read-out and vehicle settings customisation menu,
– remote radio and navigation
system.
13 Steering column stalk for windscreen and rear screen wash/
wiper.
14 Controls for:
– headlight beam height remote adjustment;
– lighting rheostat for control instru- ments;
– steering wheel heating control.
16 Control for adjusting steering
wheel height and reach.
18 Switches for:
– hazard warning lights;
– electric door locking.
19 Gearstick.
20 Storage compartment/cup holders.
21 Cruise control/speed limiter main
control.
22 Assisted parking brake control.
23 Multi-Sense control.
24 Accessories and multimedia sockets.
25 Glove compartment
26 Handbrake.
27 Bonnet release control.
1.55
WARNING LIGHTS (1/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
A
B
š
á
k
f
Side light warning light
Main beam headlight telltale
Dipped beam headlight telltale
Rear fog lights tell-tale
Automatic main beam headlight indicator light
Please refer to the information
on “External signals and lights” in
Section 1.
Instrument panel A or B: This comes
on when the driver's door is opened.
Warning light ® requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
1.56
In some cases, the appearance of a
warning light is accompanied by a message.
If no lights or sounds are apparent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This
indicates that it is essential
to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). Ensure that the
vehicle is correctly immobilised and
contact an approved Dealer.
c
b
Left-hand direction indicator
tell-tale
Right-hand direction indicator tell-tale
The © warning light means
you should drive very carefully to
an approved dealer as soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your
vehicle.
WARNING LIGHTS (2/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Low fuel level warning light
It lights up orange when the ignition or the engine is switched on then,
depending on the vehicle, goes off after
a few seconds or is displayed in white.
If it comes on orange while driving and
is accompanied by a beep, fill up with
fuel as soon as possible. There is only
approximately 30 miles (50 km) worth
of fuel left.
M
STOP light
® This lights up when the ignition or engine is switched on and goes
out as soon as the engine is running. It
comes on with other warning lights and/
or messages, and is accompanied by
a beep.
It requires you to stop immediately, for
your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Switch off the engine and
do not restart it.
Contact an approved Dealer.
D
Brake circuit fault warning
light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it comes on during braking and is accompanied by the ® warning light
and a beep, it indicates that the fluid
level in the circuit is low or that there is
a braking system fault.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow
and consult an approved dealer.
Ú
Battery charge warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompanied by the ® warning light and a
beep, this indicates an overload or discharge in the electrical circuit.
Stop as soon as traffic conditions allow
and contact an approved Dealer.
À
Oil pressure warning light
It lights up when the ignition or
the engine is switched on and goes off
after a few seconds.
If it comes on on the road, accompanied by the ® warning light and
a beep, stop immediately and cut the
ignition.
Check the oil level. If the level is normal,
the indicator light is being lit by something else.
Call an approved Dealer.
Warning light for electronic
stability program ( ESC ) and
traction control system
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
There are several reasons for the warning light to come on: please refer to the
information on “Driver correction devices and aids” in Section 2.
1.57
WARNING LIGHTS (3/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
U
Variable power-assisted
steering warning light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it comes on while driving, alongside
the warning light ® , this means
there is a system fault.
Contact an authorised dealer.
©
Warning light
This lights up when the ignition
or engine is switched on and goes out
as soon as the engine is running. It can
light up in conjunction with other warning lights and/or messages on the instrument panel.
It means you should drive very carefully to an approved dealer as soon as
possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
Ä
Toxic Fume Filter System
Warning Light
On vehicles which are equipped with it,
this light comes on when the engine is
started and, depending on the vehicle,
when the ignition is switched off if the
vehicle is in the engine standby phase
(refer to the information on the “Stop
and Start Function” in section 2) then
goes out.
– If it lights up continuously, consult
your approved dealer as soon as
possible;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
your approved Dealer as soon as
possible.
Refer to the information on “Advice:
antipollution, fuel economy and driving”
in Section 2.
x
Anti-lock braking warning
light
It lights up when the ignition or the
engine is switched on and goes off after
a few seconds.
If it lights up when you are driving, it indicates a fault in the anti-lock braking
system.
Braking will then be as normal, without
the ABS. Contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
Ô
Coolant temperature warning light
This lights up red when the ignition is
switched on or the engine is started.
If it turns red, stop and let the engine
idle for a minute or two.
The temperature should drop.
Otherwise, stop the engine. Let the
engine cool down before checking the
coolant.
Contact an approved Dealer.
1.58
WARNING LIGHTS (4/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
É
Preheating warning light
(Diesel version)
This should come on when the ignition is switched on. It indicates that the
heater plugs are in operation.
It goes out when preheating is complete. The engine can be started.
2
Š‰
Door(s) open warning light
Gear change indicator
This lights up to advise you to
change to a higher gear (up arrow) or
lower gear (down arrow).
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
Air bag warning light
This warning light will be displayed on the instrument panel when
the ignition is switched on or the engine
is started, and will then go out after a
few seconds.
å
If it does not come on when the ignition is switched on, or comes on when
the engine is running, there is a fault in
the system.
Contact your approved Dealer as soon
as possible.
Ó
Brake pedal warning light
This lights up when the brake
pedal should be depressed. Refer to
the information on the “Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
Handbrake “on” and electronic parking brake warning light
}
Refer to the information on the
“Handbrake” and “Electronic parking
brake” in Section 2.
1.59
WARNING LIGHTS (5/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Engine standby warning
light
Tyre pressure monitoring
system
Please see information in the paragraph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
Unavailability of engine
standby warning light
Rear seat belt reminder (depending
on vehicle)
Please see information in the paragraph on “Stop and Start Function” in
Section 2.
Warning light
comes on, accompanied (depending on the vehicle) by
a message indicating the number of
fastened seat belts on the instrument
panel for approximately 30 seconds,
each time the vehicle is started, a door
is opened or a rear seat belt is fastened/unfastened. Check that the rear
passengers are wearing seat belts and
that the number of seat belts shown as
fastened corresponds to the number of
rear seat places occupied.
Speed limiter warning
lights
Refer to the information on the “Speed
limiter” in Section 2.
ÐÎ
Cruise control
warning lights
Refer to the information on “Cruise control” in Section 2.
ÏΦ
Adaptive cruise control
warning light
Refer to the information on “Cruise control” in Section 2.
1.60
ß
Assisted parking brake fault
light
Please refer to the information on the
“Assisted parking brake” in Section 2.
Emergency active brake
assist
Refer to the information on “Driving correction devices and aids” in Section 2.
ECO mode warning light
This comes on when ECO
mode is activated.
Please refer to the information on “Ecodriving” in Section 2.
WARNING LIGHTS (6/6)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
C
Driver’s seat belt reminder
and, depending on the vehicle, front passenger seat belt reminder.
ß
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on, then, if the driver's or front
passenger's (if this seat is occupied)
seat belt is not fastened and the vehicle
has reached approximately 12.4 mph
(20 km/h), it flashes and a beep sounds
for around 120 seconds.
Note: an object placed on the passenger seat base can activate the warning
light.
On display C
Passenger airbag ON
Please refer to the information
on “Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
Passenger airbag OFF
Please refer to the information
on “Child safety: deactivating/activating
the front passenger airbag” in Section 1.
¹
1.61
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (1/6)
Driving style indicator 3
Please refer to the information on “Ecodriving” in Section 2.
1
A
Trip computer and warning system
2
3
Instrument panel A
lights up when the driver’s door is
opened. In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied
by a message.
On a vehicle equipped with a multifunction screen you can customise your instrument panel with the content and
colours of your choice.
From the multifunction screen, select
the menu “System”, then “User profile”.
Refer to the handbook for the equipment.
1.62
Rev counter 1
(graduations x 1000)
Speedometer 2
This is displayed differently according
to how the instrument panel is customised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and country, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long
as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
Refer to the information on the “Trip
computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (2/6)
6
5
4
Coolant temperature indicator 4
Fuel gauge 6
In normal use, indicator 4 should be
before area 5. Under “intensive” operating conditions, the needle may approach this zone. This is not serious
unless the warning light ® comes
on accompanied by a message on the
instrument panel and a beep.
If the level is at the minimum, warn-
M
integrated in the indicaing light
tor comes on orange, accompanied by
a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
1.63
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (3/6)
8
B
7
9
Instrument panel B
lights up when the driver’s door is
opened. In some cases, the appearance of a warning light is accompanied
by a message.
Rev counter 7
(graduations x 1000)
Speedometer 8
This is displayed differently according
to how the instrument panel is customised.
Overspeed buzzer
Depending on the vehicle and country, a buzzer sounds for approximately
10 seconds every 40 seconds, as long
as the vehicle is travelling in excess of
72 mph (120 km/h).
1.64
Driving style indicator 9
Please refer to the information on “Ecodriving” in Section 2.
Trip computer and warning system
Refer to the information on the “Trip
computer and warning system” in
Section 1.
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (4/6)
Instrument panel in miles
(option to switch to km/h)
11
12
10
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
13 14
15
– With the ignition off, press the OK
button 13 and the engine start/stop
button 15;
– using control 14, select “Settings”,
“Instrument panel”, then the unit;
– Press the OK button 13 to confirm.
To return to the previous mode, repeat
the same operation.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
Coolant temperature indicator 10
Engine oil level low warning
In normal use, the indicator 10 should
be before the red zone 11. Under “intensive” operating conditions, the
needle may approach this zone. This
is not serious unless the warning light
® comes on accompanied by a
message on the instrument panel and
a beep.
When the engine is started, the instrument panel display alerts you when the
minimum oil level is reached. Refer to
the information on the “Engine oil level”
in Section 4.
Fuel gauge 12
Subsequent warnings will disappear
automatically after around 30 seconds.
If the level is at the minimum, warn-
On the multifunction screen, select
“System” , “User profile” and “Unit”.
Note: In both cases, once the battery
is switched off, the on-board computer
automatically returns to the original unit
of measurement.
The first time the warning appears, it
can be cleared by pressing switch 13
“OK”.
M
integrated in the indicaing light
tor comes on orange, accompanied by
a beep. Fill up as soon as possible.
1.65
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (5/6)
16
You can adjust certain settings from the
multifunction screen: with the engine
running, access menu “System”,
“Display” then “Head-up display”.
Adjusting the display information
height
Depending on your driving position,
you can raise or lower the information
on the display.
Adjusting the display brightness
Head-up display 16
The display details driving and navigation information from the instrument
panel and the multifunction screen.
If fitted to the vehicle, this comes on
when the engine is started and is retracted when the engine is switched off.
Do not manually force the opening/
closure of the head-up display.
1.66
You can adjust the brightness (day or
night mode)
– automatically: the brightness will
vary depending on the outdoor light.
– manually: the brightness automatically switches with the activation/deactivation of the lights.
In both cases, the day mode varies
based on the outdoor brightness.
Good information visibility can be affected by:
– the seat position;
– the presence of an object placed
on the opened display;
– the polarisation of some spectacle
lenses;
– extreme weather conditions (rain,
snow, very strong sunlight, etc.).
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
In the event of contradictory information between
the instrument panel and
the head-up display/multifunction screen, please refer to the
information displayed on the instrument panel.
DISPLAYS AND INDICATORS (6/6)
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction (the display fails to open when the engine is
started, or the display retracts, with the
engine running, following an object impacting the display):
– stop and restart the engine;
or
– from the multifunction screen,
change the display opening settings.
If there is still a problem, contact an authorised dealer.
With the display opened or closed,
no object should be placed on it or
in its housing.
Do not use solvents, detergents or
an abrasive cloth to clean the display.
Only use a microfibre wipe.
1.67
TRIP COMPUTER: general information (1/2)
Display selection keys 2
1
2
Scroll through the following information
by repeated short presses on button 2
(the display depends on the vehicle
equipment and country):
a) total mileage and trip mileage recorder;
b) journey parameters:
– average fuel consumption;
– current fuel consumption;
– estimated range;
– distance travelled;
– average speed;
c) current speed;
On-board computer 1
d) distance before service;
Depending on the vehicle, this includes
the following functions:
e) tyre pressure reset;
– distance travelled;
– journey parameters;
– information messages;
– operating fault messages (associated with the © warning light);
– warning messages (associated with
the ® warning light);
All these functions are described on the
following pages.
1.68
f) trip log, operating faults and information message readout.
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: general information (2/2)
Interpreting some of the
values displayed after
resetting
The values showing average fuel consumption and average speed will
become more stable and reliable the
further you have travelled since the last
time the Reset button was pressed.
3
The average fuel consumption may decrease when:
– the vehicle stops accelerating;
Trip mileage resetting
With “trip mileage recorder” selected
on the display, press key OK 3 until the
mileage recorder resets to zero.
Resetting the journey
parameters (reset button)
with the display showing one of the trip
settings, press key OK 3 until the display is reset to zero.
– the engine reaches its operating
temperature (if the engine was cold
when the reset key was pressed);
– when driving from an urban area
onto the open road.
Automatic resetting of the
journey parameters
Resetting occurs automatically when
the maximum value of any of the parameters is exceeded.
1.69
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (1/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
101778 km
112.4 km
a) Total mileage and trip mileage recorder.
Middle
b) Journey parameters:
Average fuel consumption.
The value is displayed after having travelled at least 400 metres since the last
reset.
5.8 L/100
Current
7.4 L/100
1.70
Current fuel consumption.
This value is displayed after a speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) is reached.
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (2/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Range
541 km
Interpreting the display selected
b) Journey parameters (continued):
Estimated range with remaining fuel.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
Distance
522 km
Middle
123.4 km/H
55.8 mph (90 km/h)
Distance travelled since last reset.
Average speed since the last reset.
The value is displayed after driving 400 metres.
c) Current speed.
1.71
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (3/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
On-board computer with mileagebefore-service message
Interpreting the display selected
d) Mileage before service or oil change.
Service Intervals
Service in
30 000 Kms / 12 mo
Service due in
300 Kms / 24 days
Service required
Mileage before service
With the ignition switched on, the engine not running and
the display set to “Reichweite bis zur Wartung”, press button
OK for approximately 5 seconds to display the mileage before
service (distance or time to the next service). When the distance
value approaches its limit, there are several possible scenarios:
– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or
one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed along
with the nearest limit (distance or time);
– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light ©.
The vehicle requires a service as soon as possible.
Resetting: to reset the distance before service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows
the mileage permanently.
Note: If a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.72
TRIP COMPUTER: trip settings (4/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
On-board computer with distance before
next service message (cntd.)
Service Intervals
Oil change in
30 000 Kms / 24 mo
Service due in
300 Kms / 24 days
Service required
Interpreting the display selected
d) Mileage before service or oil change.
Mileage before service
With the ignition on, the engine not running and the display
selected “Reichweite bis zur Wartung”, press button OK for about
5 seconds to display the mileage before the next service, then
press button 2 to view the mileage before the next oil change
(distance or time remaining before the next service). When the
distance value approaches its limit, there are several possible
scenarios:
– distance/time remaining less than 900 miles (1,500 km) or
one month: the message “Service due in” is displayed, accompanied by the nearest term (distance or time);
– range equal to 0 km/miles or service date reached: the
message “Service required” is displayed accompanied by
warning light ©.
The vehicle requires an oil change as soon as possible.
Depending on the vehicle, the mileage before an oil change varies according to the driving style (frequent driving at low speed,
door-to-door journeys, extensive use at idling speed, towing a trailer, etc.). The distance remaining until the next oil change can
therefore decrease more quickly in some cases than the actual distance travelled.
Resetting: to reset the mileage before a service, press and hold button 2 for approximately 10 seconds until the display shows
the range permanently.
Note: If a service is performed without changing the engine oil, only the mileage before the next service should be reset. In the
event of an oil change, both the distance before the next service and the next oil change should be reset.
1.73
ON-BOARD COMPUTER: trip settings (5/5)
The display of information shown below DEPENDS ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT AND COUNTRY.
Examples of selections
Interpreting the display selected
e) Reset the tyre pressure.
+
No message
memorised
Tyre pressure
Refer to the information on the “Tyre pressure
monitoring system” in Section 2.
f) Trip log.
Successive display:
– information messages (passenger airbag OFF
etc.);
– operating fault messages (Check injection
system, etc.).
1.74
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: information messages
These can help in the vehicle starting phase, or give information about a selection or a driving status.
Examples of information messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages
« Parking brake on »
« Checking control
functions »
Interpreting the display selected
Indicates that the parking brake has been applied.
Displayed with the ignition on when the vehicle is running self-diagnostics.
« Turn steering
wheel + START »
Turn the steering wheel slightly whilst pressing the vehicle start button to unlock the steering
column.
« Steering wheel
not locked »
Indicates that the steering column has not been locked.
1.75
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: operating fault messages
These appear with the © warning light and mean that you should drive very carefully to an authorised dealer as
soon as possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
They disappear when the display selection key is pressed or after several seconds and are stored in the computer log. The
© warning light stays on. Examples of operating fault messages are given in the following pages.
Examples of messages
Interpreting the display selected
« Clean diesel filter »
Indicates the presence of water in the diesel filter; contact an approved Dealer
as soon as possible.
« Check lighting »
Indicates a fault in the headlights.
« Check vehicle »
Indicates a fault in one of the pedal sensors, battery management system or oil
level sensor.
« Check airbag »
Indicates a fault in the restraint system in addition to the seat belts. In the event
of an accident, it is possible that they may not be triggered.
« Check anti-pollution system »
Indicates a fault in the vehicle’s particle filter system.
1.76
TRIP COMPUTER AND WARNING SYSTEM: warning message
These appear with the ® warning light and require you to stop immediately, for your own safety, as soon as traffic conditions allow. Stop your engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Some examples of warning messages are given below. Note: the messages appear on the display either individually or alternately (when there are several messages to be displayed), and may be accompanied by a warning light and/or a beep.
Examples of messages
Interpreting the display selected
« Engine failure hazard »
Indicates an injection fault, the vehicle’s engine has overheated or there is a
serious engine fault.
“Power steering fault”
Indicates a fault in the steering or a problem with the four-wheel drive.
“Braking system fault” or ”Stop vehicle”
Indicates a fault in the braking system. Apply the electronic parking brake manually and ensure that the vehicle is immobilised using a chock.
« Electric failure DANGER »
Indicates a fault in the vehicle battery charging circuit (alternator etc.).
« Puncture »
Indicates a puncture on the tyre displayed on the instrument panel.
1.77
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (1/2)
Adjusting the settings
1
Select the function to modify:
a) Free wheel in ECO mode;
(please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, ECO-driving” in
Section 2)
b) Unlock driver door only
c) Auto door lock while driving;
d) Use handsfree card: open/close;
e) Indicator sound volume;
f) Internal welcome sound;
g) External welcome;
Depending on the vehicle equipment,
this function allows you to activate/deactivate and adjust some of the vehicle’s functions.
h) Automatic Cabin Light;
i) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged;
j) Driving style indicator;
k) Active noise control;
Vehicles fitted with a
navigation system
Select “ON” or “OFF” to activate or deactivate the function.
Accessing the settings menu
With the vehicle at a standstill, using
the multifunction screen 1, select menu
“Vehicle”, “User settings” to access the
various settings.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is stationary.
1.78
VEHICLE SETTINGS CUSTOMISATION MENU (2/2)
Adjusting the settings
Browse using the control 4 to select the
function to adjust:
2
3
4
a) Free wheel in ECO mode;
(please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, ECO-driving” in
Section 2)
b) Auto door lock while driving;
c) Unlock driver door only;
d) Rear wiper when rear gear engaged;
e) Front park assist;
f) Automaticmain beam lights;
Vehicles not fitted with a
navigation system
Accessing the settings menu on
display 2
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 3 OK to access the
settings menu.
g) Lane departure warning : VOLUME;
h) Lane departure warning : Sensitivity ;
i) Rear park assist;
j) PARKING ASSIST VOLUME;
Once a line has been selected, press
the switch 3 OK to adjust the function.
If you select either “PARKING ASSIST
VOLUME” or “LANGUAGE”, you will
have to make a further selection (sound
volume of the parking distance control
or instrument panel language). In this
case, make your selection and confirm it by holding the switch 3 OK – the
~
selected value is shown by a
in
front of the line.
To exit the menu, press the control 4
upwards or downwards. It may be necessary to carry out this operation several times.
For further explanations of the Free
wheel in ECO mode function refer to
the information on “Driving Advice,
ECO driving” in section 2.
k) LANGUAGE.
=
<
function activated
function deactivated
The vehicle settings personalisation
menu cannot be used when driving. At speed exceeding 12 mph
(20 km/h), the instrumental panel
display switches automatically back
to trip computer and warning system
mode.
1.79
STEERING WHEEL
Activating the function
3
4
With the ignition on, press the switch 2,
the warning light integrated in the
switch lights up.
Deactivating the function
1
- Automatic:
The function switches off automatically
after the regulation phase of approximately 30 minutes. The warning light
integrated in the switch 2 remains on.
2
Note: If the function has switched off
automatically, press the switch 2 twice
to reactivate it.
Adjusting the steering wheel
height and depth
Steering wheel heating
If the switch 2 is not pressed again,
the function will be reactivated the next
time the ignition is switched on.
Lower the lever 1 and position the
steering wheel in the required position.
This function heats the steering wheel
in areas 3 and 4.
Then, raise the lever fully, beyond the
point of resistance to lock the steering
wheel.
Operating principle
- Manually:
To deactivate the function during the regulation phase, press the switch 2. The
indicator light in the switch 2 goes out.
Make sure that the steering wheel is
correctly locked.
For safety reasons, only
adjust the steering wheel
when the vehicle is stationary.
1.80
(depending on the vehicle)
When the temperature is reached, the
function regulates the temperature of
the heated areas for approximately
30 minutes and then switches off automatically.
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING
Power-assisted steering
Variable power-assisted steering
The variable power assisted steering
system is equipped with an electronic
control system which alters the level of
assistance to suit the vehicle speed.
Steering is made easier during parking
manoeuvres (for added comfort) while
the force needed to steer increases
progressively as the speed rises (for
enhanced safety at high speeds).
Stop and Start feature
Depending on the vehicle, when the
engine switches to standby, the steering assistance may no longer be operational. In this case it returns to its original state when the engine is restarted
or when the speed moves above
0.62 mph (1 km/h) (hill, slope, etc.).
Never leave the steering wheel at
full lock while stationary.
With the engine switched off, or if
there is a system fault, it is still possible to turn the steering wheel. The
force required will be greater.
Engine on standby - powerassisted steering is no
longer operational.
Do not switch off the engine
when driving downhill and,
as a general rule, when
driving (the power-assisted
steering and brake cannot operate
normally).
1.81
CLOCK AND EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE
1
2
External temperature
indicator
Special note:
When the exterior temperature is between –3 °C and +3 °C, the characters
°C flash and the message “Risk of
black ice” is displayed on the instrument panel 1.
The time and/or external temperature are displayed on the multifunction screen 2
Refer to the handbook for the equipment.
External temperature
indicator
As ice formation is related
to climatic exposure, local
air humidity and temperature, the
external temperature alone is not
sufficient to detect ice.
1.82
In the event of a break in the electric power supply (battery disconnected, cut feed wire, etc.), depending on the vehicle:
– the clock is reset automatically
after a few minutes as soon as the
system is able to receive the GPS
information.
or
– the clock must be reset. We recommend that you do not adjust
these settings while driving.
DOOR MIRRORS (1/2)
Folding door mirrors
D
The door mirrors automatically fold in
when the vehicle is locked (switch 3 in
position B).
E
In any case, you can make the door
mirrors fold in (switch 3 in position C) or
fold out (switch 3 in position A).
2
1
A
B
Automatic mode is then deactivated. To
reactivate it, position switch 3 to B.
3
Welcome and goodbye function
(depending on the vehicle)
From the multifunction screen, select
menu “Vehicle”, “User settings”,
“External welcome” and activate or deactivate the function (ON or OFF).
Depending on the selected choice, the
door mirrors will fold out:
– when the ignition is next switched on
(function deactivated);
– upon detecting the RENAULT card
or upon unlocking the vehicle (function activated).
C
Door mirrors
Adjustment
Select the door mirror using switch 2,
then use button 1 to adjust it to the desired position.
Heated door mirrors
Mirror de-icing is carried out at the
same time as rear screen de-icing.
Please refer to the information
on “Manual air conditioning” and
“Automatic climate control”.
The driver’s door mirror
may have two clearly defined zones. Zone E shows
what can normally be seen
in an ordinary rear view mirror.
Zone D increases rear side visibility.
Objects in the mirror are closer
than they appear.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
1.83
DOOR MIRRORS (2/2)
4
A
3
C
Special feature:
When the rear-view mirror has been
manually deployed or folded back, it is
possible to reset it to a usage position.
To do this, position the switch 3 to C.
A mechanical noise from the rear-view
mirror unit will be heard.
If it is not the case, place switch 3 to A
and then place switch 3 to C until the
mechanical noise of the rear-view
mirror is heard.
1.84
Interior rear view mirror
Rear view mirror with lever 4
When driving at night, to avoid being
dazzled by the headlights of the vehicle
behind, depress the little lever located
behind rear view mirror 4.
Rear view mirror without lever 4
The rear-view mirror automatically
darkens when you are being followed
by a vehicle using main beam headlights or in very bright lighting.
Information regarding the activation
and deactivation of the front passenger airbag is displayed on the interior rear-view mirror (please refer
to information in “Child safety: front
passenger airbag deactivation/activation” in Section 1).
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (1/2)
For manual settings
Examples of positions for adjusting control A according to the load
0
Driver alone, or with front passenger
2
All seats occupied
4
Driver with or without passengers and luggage (or load)
reaching the maximum permissible all-up weight
A
On vehicles fitted with this function,
control A allows you to adjust the height
of the beams according to the load.
Turn control A downwards to lower the
headlights and upwards to raise them.
For vehicles not fitted with a control A, the headlight adjustment is
automatic, depending on the vehicle load.
1.85
HEADLIGHT BEAM ADJUSTMENT (2/2)
When driving on the left in a lefthand drive vehicle (or vice versa),
you must adjust your lights temporarily during your stay.
1
B
Temporary adjustment for
vehicles fitted with halogen
headlights
Open the bonnet and identify the marking B next to one of the front headlight
projectors.
For each headlight, using a screwdriver, turn the screw 1 by a quarter
turn towards the - symbol to lower the
beams.
Return to the starting point once your
trip is over: turn the screw 1 by a quarter turn towards the + symbol to raise
the beams.
1.86
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (1/5)
1
2
1
3
š
Side lights
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is
opposite mark 2. This indicator light on
the instrument panel comes on.
á
k
Dipped beam
headlights
Manual operation
Turn ring 3 until the symbol is opposite
mark 2. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes on.
Automatic operation
Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is opposite mark 2: with the engine running,
the dipped beam headlights switch on
or off automatically depending on the
brightness of the light outside, without
any action on stalk 1.
Main beam headlights
With the dipped beam
headlights lit, push stalk 1. This indicator light on the instrument panel comes
on.
To return to the dipped headlight position, pull the stalk 1 towards you again.
Before driving at night:
check that the electrical
equipment is operating correctly. As a general precaution, check that the lights are not
obscured (by dirt, mud, snow or objects being transported).
When driving on the left in a lefthand drive vehicle (or vice versa),
drivers must readjust their lights
throughout their stay (see “Adjusting
headlight beams” in Section 1).
1.87
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (2/5)
Automatic main beam
headlights
1
2
Depending on the vehicle, this system
switches the main beam headlights on
and off automatically. The function uses
a camera located behind the interior
rear-view mirror to detect vehicles that
are following and coming in the opposite direction.
The main beam headlights come on automatically if:
– exterior light is weak;
– no other vehicles or lighting are detected;
– the vehicle speed is above approximately 30 mph (45 km/h).
headlights. The warning light
comes on on the instrument panel.
3
1.88
Deactivation
– Pull the stalk 1towards you;
– or turn ring 3 to a position other than
AUTO ;
– or, depending on the vehicle, on the
multifunction screen: select the “vehicle” menu, followed by “Driving
assistance”, “Automaticmain beam
lights”, then choose “OFF”.
Warning light
instrument panel.
If any of the above conditions are not
fulfilled, the system switches to dipped
beam headlights.
The “automatic main beam
headlights” system should
under no circumstances be
used to replace driver attention and responsibility with regard
to vehicle lighting and adapting to
light, visibility and traffic conditions.
Activation
Turn ring 3 until the AUTO symbol is opposite mark 2.
Push stalk 1 to activate the main beam
The system may encounter difficulties under certain conditions, including:
– extreme weather conditions (rain,
snow, fog, etc.);
– obstruction in front of the windscreen or camera;
– when a following or oncoming vehicle has weak or hidden lighting;
– incorrect settings for the front
headlights;
– reflective systems;
– ...
goes out on the
Using the portable navigation system at night in the
windscreen area below the
camera may disturb the operation of the “automatic main beam
headlights” system (risk of reflection
on the windscreen).
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (3/5)
1
Daytime running lights
function
The daytime running lights come on
automatically with no action on stalk 1
when the engine is started, and they go
off once the engine is switched off.
Operating faults
When the message “Check lighting”
with warning light © is displayed
3
Operating faults
When the message “Check auto lighting” appears on the instrument
panel, the system is deactivated.
Consult an approved dealer.
k
flashes on the
and warning light
instrument panel, this indicates that
there is a lighting fault.
Consult an approved dealer.
Switching off the lights
There are two possibilities:
– manually, move ring 3 to position 0;
– automatically, the lights will go out
when the engine is switched off, the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked. In this case, the next time
the engine is started the lights will be
switched back on according to the
position of the ring 3.
Lights-on reminder buzzer
If the lights are on, a warning beep
sounds when the driver’s door is
opened to warn you that the lights are
still on.
1.89
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (4/5)
“See-me-home lighting”
function
This function allows you to briefly switch
on the dipped beam headlights (to provide light when opening a gate, etc.).
With the engine and lights off and
ring 3 in position 0 or AUTO, pull
stalk 1 towards you: the dipped beam
headlights come on for approximately
thirty seconds. To increase this duration, you may pull the stalk up to four
times (total time restricted to two minutes). The message “Follow-me home
for _ _ _” along with the time the lights
will be on for is displayed on the instrument panel to confirm this action. You
can then lock your vehicle.
To switch off the lights before they go
out automatically, turn ring 3 to any position, then return it to the AUTO position .
1.90
Welcome and goodbye
function
(depending on the vehicle)
Once the function is activated, the daytime running lights and the rear side
light light up automatically upon detecting the RENAULT card or when the vehicle is unlocked.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after lighting up;
– when starting the engine based on
the position of the lighting stalk;
or
– upon locking the vehicle.
Welcome lighting under the door
mirrors
With the function activated, the lights
located under the door mirrors come
on automatically upon detection of the
RENAULT card, upon unlocking the
vehicle or when opening a door.
They switch off automatically:
– approximately one minute after lighting up;
– upon starting the engine;
or
– upon locking the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating the function
From the multifunction screen, select
menu “vehicle”, “User settings” then
“External welcome”. Choose “ON”
or “OFF” to activate or deactivate the
function.
EXTERIOR LIGHTING AND SIGNALS (5/5)
1
2
f
Rear fog lights
Turn centre ring 4 on the stalk
until the symbol faces mark 2, then release it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting selected, and an indicator light will light up on the instrument panel.
4
g
Switching off the lights
Turn the ring 4 again until the mark 2
is opposite the symbol for the fog light
that you wish to switch off. The corresponding indicator light on the instrument panel goes out.
The fog lights switch off when the exterior lights are switched off.
Do not forget to switch off the fog lights
when they are no longer needed, to
avoid inconveniencing other road
users.
Front fog lights
Turn centre ring 4 on stalk 1
until the symbol faces mark 2, then release it.
Operation of the fog lights depends on
the exterior lighting position selected,
and an indicator light will light up on the
instrument panel.
When driving in fog or snow, or
when transporting objects which are
higher than the roof, the headlights
do not come on automatically.
Switching on the fog lights remains
the responsibility of the driver: the
indicator lights on the instrument
panel inform you whether the fog
lights are lit (indicator light on) or not
(indicator light not on).
1.91
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/6)
1
1
A
2
B
C
D
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
E
Vehicle fitted with intermittent
windscreen wipers
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
C intermittent wiping
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. It is
possible to change the time between sweeps by turning ring 2.
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
Special note
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the vehicle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
– do not use them when the windscreen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
In all cases, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: approximately once a year.
Before using the rear wiper, check
that no object obstructs the travel of
the blade.
Positions A, C and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Position E is
accessible only when the engine is
running.
1.92
– they must remain clean: clean
the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
Do not use the wiper arm to open or
close the tailgate.
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/6)
1
1
A
2
F
B
C
D
E
Vehicle fitted with front
windscreen wiper rain sensor
The rain sensor is located on the windscreen, in front of the interior rear-view
mirror.
A single sweep
A short push will trigger one sweep
of the wipers.
B stop
G
C automatic wiper function
When this position is selected, the
system detects water on the windscreen and triggers the wipers at a
suitable wiping speed. It is possible to change the triggering threshold and the time sweeps by turning
ring 2:
– F : minimum sensitivity
– G : maximum sensitivity
The higher the sensitivity, the quicker the wipers will react and the
faster the wipe.
When activating automatic wiping or
when increasing sensitivity, one sweep
of the blades is performed.
Note:
– the rain sensor is only intended as a
driving aid. In the event of reduced
visibility, the driver should manually
activate the wipers. In foggy weather
or during snowfalls, wiping is not automatically triggered and remains
under the driver’s control;
– in the event of temperatures below
zero, automatic wiping is not activated when the vehicle is started. It
is automatically activated as soon as
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed
(approximately 5 mph (8 km/h));
– do not activate automatic wiping in
dry weather;
– fully de-ice the windscreen before
activating automatic wiping.
1.93
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (3/6)
Operating fault
Special note
In the event of a malfunction of the automatic wiping, the wiper is set to intermittent wiping. Contact an authorised
dealer.
When driving the vehicle, the wiping
speed slows down whenever the vehicle stops. For example, fast wiping
speed will slow to normal wiping speed.
As soon as the vehicle moves off,
wiping will return to the speed originally
selected.
If stalk 1 is operated, it overrides and
cancels the automatic function.
1
A
B
The operation of the rain sensor can be
disturbed in the event of:
C
– damaged wiper blades; a screen
of water or traces left by a blade in
the sensor’s detection zone may increase the response time of the automatic wiper, or increase the wiping
frequency;
– a windscreen with any chip or crack
level with the sensor, or a windscreen covered in dust, dirt, insects,
ice, the use of washing wax and
water-repellent chemicals; the automatic wiping will be less sensitive, or
even unresponsive.
D
E
D slow continuous wiping
E fast continuous wiping
– In the event of ice, check whether the
blades are stuck to the windscreen
before operating the wiping mechanism. If you activate the wipers while
the blades are stuck down with ice,
you may risk damaging both the
blade and the wiper motor.
– Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to the premature wear or damage to the blades.
Positions A and D are accessible
with the ignition on. Positions C
and E are accessible only with the
engine running.
1.94
Precautions
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (4/6)
Specific front wiper position
(service position)
This position enables the blades to be
lifted to remove them from the windscreen.
It may be useful to:
– to clean the blades;
– to release the blades from the windscreen in winter;
– to replace the blades (please refer
to the information on the “Wiper
blades” in Section 5).
With the ignition on and the engine off,
lower the windscreen wiper stalk fully
(fast continuous wipe position). The
wiper arms stop in a position away from
the bonnet.
To return the blades to position, make
sure they have been placed on the
windscreen, then move the stalk to position B (stop) with the ignition on.
Before switching on the ignition,
place the wipers on the windscreen.
Otherwise, there may a risk of damage
to the bonnet or the wipers when they
are switched on.
Note:
After your intervention, to reposition the
blades correctly, make sure the blades
are resting on the windscreen, switch
on the ignition and activate the wiper
control.
In the event of obstacles present
on the windscreen (dirt, snow, ice,
etc.), clean the windscreen (including the central area located behind
the interior rear-view mirror) and
the rear screen before starting the
wipers (risk of motor overheating).
If an object is preventing a blade
from moving, it may stop functioning. Remove the obstacle and
reactivate the wiper using the wiper
stalk.
Before any action involving
the windscreen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing,
cleaning the windscreen,
etc.) return stalk 1 to position B
(stop).
Risk of injury and/or damage.
1.95
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (5/6)
Note:
1
A
B
In temperatures below zero, the washer
liquid risks freezing to the windscreen,
thereby reducing visibility. Heat the
windscreen using the demister control
before cleaning.
C
D
E
Windscreen washer
With the ignition on, pull stalk 1 then
release.
A brief pull will trigger a single sweep
of the wipers, in addition to the windscreen washer.
A longer pull will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the windscreen washer.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
1.96
WINDSCREEN WASH/WIPE (6/6)
Note:
1
To ensure the headlight washers operate correctly in winter, remove snow
from the jet trims and de-ice the jet
trims using an aerosol de-icer.
A
B
C
D
E
Headlight washers
You are recommended to regularly
remove dirt encrusted on the headlight
glass.
When the minimum windscreen washer
fluid level is reached, the headlight
washer system may be deprimed.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid and
then activate the windscreen washer,
with the engine running, to reprime
the system.
Headlights on
On equipped vehicles, hold stalk 1
pulled towards you for about 2 seconds
- the headlight washers and windscreen washers will be activated at the
same time.
The headlight washers are also activated after three prolonged movements
on the front windscreen washer control.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in position B (stop).
Risk of injury.
1.97
REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (1/2)
To stop the operation, pivot ring 3 again.
1
2
3
Note:
When washing using a roller type car
wash, return the ring 3 on the stalk 1
to the stop position to deactivate automatic wiping.
Follow usage recommendations.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
Y
– they must remain clean: clean
the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
Rear screen wiper
– do not use them when the windscreen or rear screen are dry;
With the ignition on, turn ring 3
on stalk 1 to align the symbol with
mark 2.
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
– stop;
– intermittent wiping.
The wipers will pause for several
seconds between sweeps. Wiping
frequency varies with vehicle
speed;
– slow continuous wiping.
In all cases, replace them as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency: approximately once a year.
Before any action involving
the rear screen (washing
the vehicle, de-icing, cleaning, etc.) return stalk 1 to
the stop position.
Risk of injury and/or damage.
1.98
Before using the rear wiper, check
that no object obstructs the travel of
the blade.
Do not use the wiper arm to open or
close the tailgate.
REAR SCREEN WASH/WIPE (2/2)
Activation/deactivation of the rear
screen wiper
Engaging reverse gear triggers intermittent wiping (if the front wipers are in
operation). If your vehicle is fitted with
a vehicle settings customisation menu,
you can opt to activate or deactivate
this function. To do this, refer to the information on the “Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1; “Rear
wiping in reverse gear”.
For vehicles not fitted with a settings
customisation menu, you can have this
function deactivated by an authorised
dealer.
In the event of obstacles present on the
rear window (dirt, snow, etc.), the wiper
will try to sweep away all the obstacles.
If an obstacle prevents the blade from
moving, it can be stopped. Remove the
obstacle, wait for around 30 seconds
and reactivate the wiper using the wiper
stalk.
1
Precautions
– In the event of ice, check whether
the blades are stuck to the windscreen before operating the wiping
mechanism. If you activate the wiper
while the blade is blocked by ice, you
risk damaging both the blade and the
wiping motor.
– Do not activate the wipers on a dry
screen. This will lead to the premature wear or damage to the blades.
p
Rear screen wash/wipe
With the ignition on, push and
hold stalk 1, then release.
A longer action will trigger three sweeps
of the wipers followed, a few seconds
later, by a fourth, in addition to the windscreen washer.
1.99
FUEL TANK (1/3)
Diesel versions
Only use diesel fuel which complies
with the information on the label located
inside the cover 1.
1
2
1
It is essential to use unleaded petrol.
The octane rating (RON) must comply
with the information given on the label
on the cover 1. Refer to Section 6 for
information on “Engine specifications”.
A
Useable fuel tank capacity:
Fuel grade
– all engines except 1.6 TCe: approximately 10.34 gal (47 litres);
Use a high-grade fuel that complies
with the legislation in force in each
country and which must comply with
the specifications given on the label
on the cover 1. Please refer to the information on “Engine specifications” in
Section 6.
– 1.6 TCe engine: approximately
11.22 gal (51 litres).
With the vehicle unlocked, to open
cover 1, press area A then release. The
cover 1 opens.
Valve 2 is integrated into the filler pipe.
For details on filling the fuel tank, refer
to the information on “Filling with fuel”.
To close it, press on the fuel filler flap by
hand, as far as it will go.
Never press valve 2 with
your fingers.
washer.
1.100
Petrol versions
Do not wash the filler
area with a high-pressure
Do not mix even small
amounts of petrol (unleaded or E85) with diesel.
Do not use ethanol-based
fuel if your vehicle is not compatible
with this fuel.
Do not add additive to the fuel –
otherwise you risk damaging the
engine.
FUEL TANK (2/3)
Filling with fuel
With the ignition off, insert the nozzle to
open valve 2 and insert it fully before
turning it on to fill the fuel tank (risk of
splashing).
2
Keep the nozzle in this position throughout the entire filling operation.
When the pump cuts out automatically
at the end of the filling procedure, a
maximum of two further filling attempts
may be made, as there must be sufficient space in the fuel tank to allow for
expansion.
Make sure that no water enters the fuel
tank during filling. The valve 2 and its
surround must remain clean.
Petrol versions
Using leaded petrol will damage the
antipollution system and may lead to a
loss of warranty.
To ensure that the fuel tank is not filled
with leaded petrol, the fuel tank filler
neck consists of a restrictor fitted with
a safety system which only allows
a nozzle for unleaded petrol to be
used (at the pump).
Vehicle fitted with the Stop and
Start function
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
stop the engine (Please See
“Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
1.101
FUEL TANK (3/3)
Running out of fuel on diesel
versions
Vehicles with key/remote control
– Put the ignition key in “On” position M (please see the information
on the “Ignition switch” in Section
2) and wait for a few minutes before
starting, to enable the fuel circuit to
be primed;
3
– turn the key to position D. If the
engine does not start, repeat the procedure.
– If the engine does not start after several attempts, please contact an authorised dealer.
Vehicles with RENAULT card
With the card RENAULT in the passenger compartment, press the start
button 3 without pressing any of the
pedals. Wait a few minutes before starting. This will enable the fuel circuit to
be primed. If the engine does not start,
repeat the procedure.
If the engine does not start after several
attempts, please contact an authorised
dealer.
1.102
No modifications whatsoever are permitted on
any part of the fuel supply
system (electronic units,
wiring, fuel circuit, injectors, protective covers, etc.) as this may be
dangerous (unless undertaken by
qualified Network personnel).
Persistent smell of
fuel
If you notice a persistent
smell of fuel you should:
– stop the vehicle as soon as traffic conditions allow and switch off
the ignition;
– switch on the hazard warning
lights and ask your passengers
to leave the vehicle and to keep
away from traffic;
– contact an approved Dealer.
Section 2: Driving
(Advice on use relating to fuel economy and the environment)
Running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting, stopping the engine: vehicle with key/remote control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting - Stopping the engine: vehicle with RENAULT card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standing start procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stop and Start Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special features of petrol versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special features of Diesel versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear lever/Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving advice, Eco-driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and antipollution advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver correction devices/aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane departure warning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blind spot warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safe distance alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speeding alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adaptive cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking distance control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assisted parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic gearbox. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.8
2.10
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.20
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.30
2.40
2.43
2.47
2.49
2.52
2.55
2.59
2.66
2.71
2.73
2.77
2.1
RUNNING IN
Petrol version
Diesel version
For the first 600 miles (1,000 km), do
not exceed 78 mph (130 km/h) in the
highest gear, or 3,000 to 3,500 rpm.
For the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),
do not exceed 80 mph (130 km/h) in
the highest gear, or 2,500 rpm. After
completing this mileage you may drive
faster, although you may only expect
top performance after approximately
3,600 miles (6,000 km).
You may only expect top performance
from your vehicle after approximately
1,800 miles (3,000 km).
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
During the running in period, do not accelerate hard while the engine is still
cold and do not let the engine over-rev.
Service intervals: refer to the
Maintenance Document for your vehicle.
2.2
IGNITION SWITCH: vehicle with key
Ignition position M.
The ignition is switched on:
Start position D
If the engine fails to start at the first
attempt, the key must be turned back
before the starter can be activated
again. Release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Note: on diesel versions, several seconds may pass between turning the
key and the engine starting to allow for
engine preheating.
Ignition switch
“Stop and steering lock” position St
To lock: remove the key and turn the
steering wheel until the steering column
locks.
To unlock: turn the key and the steering
wheel slightly.
“Accessories” position A
When the ignition is switched off, any
accessories (radio, etc.) will continue to
function.
2.3
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with key
É
Diesel versions
– Turn the ignition key to the “Ignition
on” position M, and hold this position
until the engine preheating light goes
off;
– turn the key to starter position D
without depressing the accelerator pedal;
– release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Starting the engine
Special note: if starting the engine
when the outdoor temperature is very
low (below - 10 ° C): hold down the
clutch pedal until the engine starts.
Petrol versions
– Activate the starter without accelerating;
– release the key as soon as the
engine starts.
Never start your vehicle
while freewheeling on a
gradient. Risk of non-activation of power-assisted
steering.
There is a risk of accidents.
2.4
Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steering, etc. and the passive safety devices such as air bags and pretensioners will no longer operate.
Stopping the engine
With the engine idling, turn the key
back to the “Stop” position St.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (1/3)
“Hands-free” starting with
the tailgate open
2
1
In this case, the RENAULT card should
not be located in the boot, to avoid any
risk of loss.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
Conditions for starting the
engine
The RENAULT card must be inserted in
detection zone 1.
To start:
– vehicles with an automatic gearbox,
place the lever in position P, depress
the brake pedal and press button 2;
– vehicles with a manual gearbox, depress the brake or clutch pedal and
press button 2. If a gear is engaged,
the vehicle may only be started by
depressing the clutch pedal.
Special features
– If one of starting conditions is not applied, the message “Press brake +
START” or “Press clutch + START”
or “Select P” is displayed on the instrument panel;
– in some cases, it will be necessary to
move the steering wheel while pressing start button 1 to assist in unlocking the steering column. A message
on the instrument panel “Turn steering wheel + START” warns of this.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
2.5
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (2/3)
2
Accessories function
(switching on the ignition)
Once you have gained access to your
vehicle, you may use some of its functions (radio, navigation, wipers, etc.).
To use the other functions, with the
RENAULT card in the passenger compartment, press button 2 without pressing the pedals.
3
Operating faults
In certain cases, the RENAULT “handsfree” card may not work:
– when the RENAULT card battery is
drained, etc.;
– near to appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (monitor, mobile phone, video game,
etc.);
– vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
The message “Place card close START
and push” or depending on the vehicle
“Place card near symbol + START” appears on the instrument panel.
2.6
4
Press the brake or clutch pedal, then
place the RENAULT 3 card (logo side)
for around 2 seconds in contact with.
– the start button 2 in left-hand drive
vehicles;
or
– the symbol 4 in right-hand drive vehicles.
Press button 2 to start the vehicle. The
message goes out.
STARTING, STOPPING THE ENGINE: vehicle with RENAULT card (3/3)
2
Conditions for stopping the
engine
If the RENAULT card is no longer in the
passenger compartment when you try
to switch the engine off, the message
“No keycard Press and hold” appears
on the instrument panel: press the
button 2 for longer than two seconds.
If the card is no longer in the passenger compartment, make sure you can
retrieve it before pressing and holding
the button. Without the card RENAULT
, you will not be able to start.
Driver’s responsibility
when parking or stopping
the vehicle
With the engine switched off, any accessories being used (radio, etc.) will
continue to function for approximately
10 minutes.
Never leave an animal,
child or adult who is not self-sufficient alone in your vehicle, even for
a short time.
When the driver’s door is opened, the
accessories stop working.
They may pose a risk to themselves
or to others by starting the engine,
activating equipment such as the
electric windows or locking the
doors, for example.
The vehicle must stationary, with the
lever positioned in N or P for vehicles
with an automatic transmission.
With the RENAULT card in the vehicle,
press the 2 button: the engine will stop.
The steering column is locked when the
driver’s door is opened or the vehicle
is locked.
When you leave your vehicle, especially if you have
your RENAULT card with
you, check that the engine
is completely switched off.
Never switch off the ignition before the vehicle has
stopped completely. Once
the engine has stopped, the
brake servo, power-assisted steering, etc. and the passive safety devices such as air bags and pretensioners will no longer operate.
Also, in hot and/or sunny weather,
please remember that the temperature inside the passenger compartment increases very quickly.
RISK OF DEATH OR SERIOUS
INJURY.
2.7
STANDING START PROCEDURE (1/2)
Activating the system
1
The system is activated by:
– with the engine running, and the vehicle stationary;
– Sport mode activated (please see
the “Multi-Sense” section);
– depress the brake pedal with the left
foot;
– keeping the brake pedal pressed,
pull the two steering wheel paddles 1 until the message “Launch
Control ON” appears on the instrument panel;
If fitted on the vehicle, with the vehicle
stationary, the standing start procedure
(Launch Control) is a function which
permits maximum acceleration.
Note: This function should only be used
when the mechanical components have
reached their operating temperature.
– release the paddles 1;
– with your left foot still pressing the
brake pedal, press the accelerator
pedal fully to beyond the point of
resistance with your right foot (the
engine speed will automatically stabilise at around 2500 rpm);
– within 3 seconds, release the brake
pedal for a sporty vehicle start.
Heavy use of the system will reduce
the service life of the mechanical
components (clutch, transmission,
etc.).
Do not use this function on
slippery or wet roads.
Risk of loss of control of
the vehicle.
Because of the acceleration gained, this function
should only be used if traffic conditions permit, and
in compliance with the local driving
regulations. Please ensure all the
conditions are met before each use.
Risk of accident or serious injury.
2.8
STANDING START PROCEDURE (2/2)
Conditions for non-activation of the
system
Certain conditions will not enable the
system to be activated:
– five successive authorised standing
start procedures - beyond five procedures being performed, the function
will be prevented for approximately
10 minutes;
– high clutch temperature;
– excessive road gradient percentage;
– after 1,500 starts, the function is fully
disabled;
– fault in the vehicle system (ESC,
etc.).
Note: If the function is prevented by
any of these conditions, the message
“Launch Control ON” will not be displayed on the instrument panel.
The function is programmed for a
maximum of 1500 uses. Beyond
this limit, the function will be definitively deactivated.
To view the remaining number,
please contact an authorised dealer.
Note: The use of the function accelerates wear on the tyres – please
refer to the information on “Tyres” in
Section 5 of your driver’s handbook.
Because of the acceleration gained, this function
should only be used if traffic conditions permit, and
in compliance with the local driving
regulations. Please ensure all the
conditions are met before each use.
Risk of accident or serious injury.
2.9
STOP AND START FUNCTION (1/4)
This system enables a reduced fuel
consumption and lower greenhouse
gas emissions.
The system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. While
driving, the system stops the engine
(standby) when the vehicle is at a
standstill (traffic jam, traffic lights, etc).
Conditions for engine
standby
For manual gearboxes:
For all vehicles:
– the gearbox is in neutral;
on the instruThe warning light
ment panel is lit when the engine is on
standby. The vehicle equipment remains operational while the engine is
stopped.
– and the clutch pedal is released. If
flashes, this
the warning light
means that the clutch pedal is not
sufficiently released;
– and the vehicle speed is less than
approximately 1.86 mph (3 km/h).
In this case it becomes operational
again when the engine is no longer on
standby or the speed exceeds approximately 0.62 mph (1 km/h) (downhill,
slope, etc.).
The vehicle has set off from where it
was parked;
For automatic gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in position D, M or N;
– and the brake pedal is pressed (sufficiently hard);
– and the accelerator pedal is not
pressed;
– and the speed is zero for around
1 second.
The engine remains on standby if position P is selected, or if position N is selected with the handbrake engaged and
the brake pedal released.
Before getting out of the
vehicle, you must switch
off the ignition (please see
section on “Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.10
Depending on the vehicle, when the
engine switches to standby, the steering assistance may no longer be operational.
If the engine stalls while the system
is in operation, pressing the clutch
pedal right down will start it again.
Keep your vehicle stationary when the engine is
on standby (shown by the
warning light
instrument panel).
on the
If the engine is put in
standby, the electronic
parking brake (depending
on the vehicle) is not applied automatically.
Engine on standby - powerassisted steering is no
longer operational.
Engine on standby - braking
assistance is no longer operational.
STOP AND START FUNCTION (2/4)
Preventing the engine from
standing by
Conditions for coming out of
engine standby
In certain situations, such as negotiating a crossroads for instance, it is possible (with the system activated) to keep
the engine running so as to be ready to
move off quickly.
For automatic gearboxes:
Automatic gearbox:
Keep the vehicle stationary without
pressing too hard on the brake pedal.
Manual gearbox:
Keep the clutch pedal pressed right
down.
– the brake pedal is released, position D or M engaged;
– or the brake pedal is released, position N engaged and the parking
brake off;
– or the brake pedal is pressed again,
with position P engaged or position N
engaged with the parking brake applied;
– or position R is engaged;
– or the accelerator pedal is pressed;
– or in manual mode the gear lever is
moved towards + or -.
Special note: depending on the vehicle, if you switch off the ignition when
the engine is on standby, the warning
Ä
light
is displayed for a few seconds on the instrument panel.
For manual gearboxes:
– the gearbox is in neutral and the
clutch pedal is slightly depressed, or
– the engine is in gear and the clutch
pedal is pressed right down.
To fill up with fuel, the engine must
be stopped (and not on standby):
always stop the engine (please see
“Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.11
STOP AND START FUNCTION (3/4)
Conditions preventing the
standby of the engine
Certain conditions prevent the system
from using the engine standby function,
including when:
– for vehicles with automatic gearboxes, the gradient is steeper than
approximately 12%;
Special case for vehicles with
a RENAULT card
– the engine temperature is too low;
With the engine on standby (traffic jam,
traffic lights, etc.), if the driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the driver’s door, or gets out of the seat, the
ignition is switched off.
– the emission control system is being
regenerated;
The assisted parking brake is applied
automatically.
for all vehicles:
– the Sport mode of the Multi-Sense is
activated (depending on the vehicle);
– reverse gear is engaged;
– ...
To restart and reactivate the Stop and
Start system, start the engine (please
refer to “Starting, stopping the engine”
in Section 2).
for vehicles equipped with a
RENAULT card:
– the driver’s door is not closed;
– the driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.
– the bonnet is not locked;
– the outdoor temperature is too low or
too high (less than around 0 °C or
higher than around 30 °C);
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
is displayed on the
Warning light
instrument panel. This notifies you that
engine standby is not available.
With the engine on standby (traffic
jam, traffic lights, etc.), if you get out of
the vehicle, a beep warns you that the
engine is on standby and has not been
stopped.
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– the difference between the vehicle
interior temperature and the automatic climate control instruction is
too high;
– parking distance control is in operation;
Deactivate the Stop and
Start function when performing any operations in
the engine compartment.
2.12
Special case of vehicles with
a key
STOP AND START FUNCTION (4/4)
Special feature of the automatic
engine re-start
The system is automatically reactivated each time the vehicle is started
(see “Starting, stopping the engine” in
Section 2).
Under certain conditions, the engine
can restart on its own in order to guarantee your safety and comfort.
This can occur especially when:
Operating faults
– the outdoor temperature is too low or
too high (less than around 0 °C or
higher than around 30 °C);
When the message “Check Stop &
Start” appears on the instrument panel
and the integrated warning light 2 lights
up on the switch 1, the system is deactivated.
Please consult an authorised dealer.
– the “Clear View” function is activated
(please see “Automatic Climate
Control” in Section 3);
– the battery is not sufficiently charged;
– the vehicle speed is above 3 mph
(5 km/h) (downhill slope, etc.);
– repeated pressing on the brake
pedal or braking system requirement;
– ...
Special feature of vehicles with
a key: for some of these conditions the automatic restarting of the
engine is inhibited if a front door is
open.
1
2
Deactivating, activating the
function
Press switch 1 to deactivate the function. The message “Stop & Start deactivated” will appear on the instrument
panel and the integrated warning light 2
on the switch will light up.
Pressing again will reactivate the
system. The message “Stop & Start activated” will appear on the instrument
panel and the integrated warning light 2
on switch 1 will go out.
Note: With the engine on standby,
press switch 1 to automatically restart the engine.
Before getting out of the
vehicle, you must switch
off the ignition (please see
section on “Starting, stopping the engine”).
2.13
SPECIAL FEATURES OF PETROL VERSIONS
The following operating conditions:
– driving for long periods when the low
fuel level warning light is lit;
– using leaded petrol;
– using fuel or lubrication additives
which are not approved.
Or operating faults such as:
– faulty ignition system, running out of
fuel or disconnected spark plugs resulting in the engine misfiring or cutting out when driving;
– loss of power,
as they may cause the catalytic converter to overheat and thus reduce its
efficiency, or damage it irreparably
and cause heat damage to the vehicle.
If you notice any of the above operating
faults, have the necessary repairs carried out as soon as possible by an approved Dealer.
These faults may be avoided by regularly taking your vehicle to an approved
Dealer at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance document.
Starting problems
To avoid damaging the catalytic converter, do not keep trying to start the
engine (using the start button, or by
pushing or towing the vehicle) without
having identified and corrected the
starting fault.
If the fault cannot be identified, do not
keep trying to start the engine, but contact an approved Dealer.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible substances or materials such as
grass or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system.
2.14
SPECIAL FEATURES OF DIESEL VERSIONS
Diesel engine speed
Diesel engines are fitted with an injection pump which prevents the engine
speed being exceeded irrespective of
the gear selected.
If the message “Check antipollution
system” is displayed along with warn-
Ä
ing lights
and ©, consult an
authorised dealer immediately.
Precautions to be taken in
winter
To avoid any faults in icy weather:
– ensure that the battery is always fully
charged,
– always keep the diesel tank relatively full to avoid water vapour condensing in it and accumulating at the
bottom of the tank.
When driving, depending on the fuel
grade used, it is possible that white
smoke may be emitted.
This is due to the exhaust particle filter
being cleaned automatically, and does
not affect the way the vehicle runs.
Running out of fuel
If the tank has been completely
drained, the system must be reprimed
after the tank is refilled: see information
on the “fuel tank” in section 1 before restarting the engine.
Do not park the vehicle or
run the engine in locations
where combustible substances or materials such
as grass or leaves can come into
contact with the hot exhaust system.
2.15
GEAR LEVER/HANDBRAKE
Handbrake
To apply:
To release:
Pull lever 3 upwards. Check that the
vehicle is immobilised. The warning
Pull the lever 3 up slightly, press
button 2 and then lower the lever to the
floor.
on the instrument panel will
}
1
2
3
The red warning light
on the instrument panel will remain on, accompanied by the message “Parking brake
on” and a beep if you are driving with an
incorrectly released handbrake.
Make sure that the handbrake is properly released
when driving (red indicator
light off), otherwise overheating, or even damage, may
occur.
Gear lever
Selecting reverse gear
Vehicle with manual gearbox: Follow
the grid marked on knob 1 and, depending on the vehicle, lift the ring against
the knob to engage reverse gear.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox: refer to the information on the
“Automatic gearbox” in Section 2.
The reversing lights will come on as
soon as reverse gear is selected with
the ignition on.
2.16
}
light
come on.
An impact to the underside of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: striking a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: deformation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
When stationary, and depending on the slope and/or
vehicle load, it may be necessary to pull up the handbrake at least two extra notches and
engage a gear (1st or reverse gear)
for vehicles with a manual gearbox
or position P for vehicles with an automatic gearbox.
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (1/3)
Note:
To indicate that the electronic parking
brake is released, a beep sounds and
the message “Apply parking brake” appears on the instrument panel:
1
– with the engine running: when the
driver’s door is opened;
3
– with the engine switched off (eg.
when the engine stalls): when a front
door is opened.
2
Assisted operation
The electronic parking brake ensures vehicle immobilisation when the
engine is stopped and engine Start/
Stop button 1 is pressed.
In all other instances, e.g. engine stalling, the electronic parking brake is not
applied automatically. Manual mode
must be used.
For certain country-specific model versions, the assisted brake application
function is not activated. Refer to the
information on “Manual operation”.
In this case, pull and release switch 2 to
apply the assisted parking brake.
To confirm that the electronic parking
brake is applied, the message “Parking
}
brake on” and warning light
on the instrument panel and warning
light 3 on the switch 2 light up.
After the engine is switched off, indicator light 3 goes out several minutes
after the electronic parking brake has
}
been applied and indicator light
goes out when the vehicle is locked.
Assisted release of the parking
brake
The brake will be released as soon as
the vehicle starts and accelerates.
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the assisted
parking brake is fully applied. Warning light 3 on
}
switch 2 and warning light
on the instrument panel light up to
show that the parking brake is applied but go out when the doors are
locked.
2.17
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (2/3)
Special cases
To park on a slope or while towing a
trailer, for example, pull switch 2 for
a few seconds to gain the maximum
braking.
To park the vehicle without applying the
electronic parking brake (if there is a
risk of freezing, for example):
– with the engine running, while simultaneously keeping the brake pedal
and switch 2 depressed, switch off
the engine by pressing the engine
Start/Stop button 1;
– in gear, release the brake pedal and
switch 2.
1
3
2
Manual operation
You can control the electronic parking
brake manually.
Applying the electronic parking
brake
Pull switch 2. Warning light 3 and warning light
light up.
}
To manually activate the electronic
parking brake, (when stopping at a red
light, or stopping when the engine is
running, etc.): pull and release switch 2.
The brake is released as soon as the
vehicle is started up again.
For vehicles fitted with a Stop and Start
function, with the engine on standby,
the electronic parking brake is automatically activated if the driver unfastens
their seat belt or opens the driver’s door
or gets out of their seat.
on the instrument panel
Releasing the electronic parking
brake
With the ignition on, depress the brake
pedal then press switch 2: warning
light 3 and warning light
2.18
Brief stop
}
go out.
Special feature relating to the Stop and Start function: in the event of unfastening the driver’s seat belt before the engine goes to standby using
the Stop and Start function, make sure the parking brake is engaged:
}
warning light
will come on the instrument panel to confirm this.
Risk of loss of immobilisation.
ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE (3/3)
Versions with an automatic
gearbox
In the event of message
“Electric failure DANGER”
or “Check battery”, manually activate the electronic
parking brake by pulling switch 2 (or
position the gear lever in P for automatic gearboxes) before stopping
the engine.
For safety reasons, automatic release
is deactivated when the driver’s door
is open or not shut properly and the
engine is running (in order to prevent
the vehicle from moving without the
driver). The “Release parking brake
manually” message appears on the
instrument panel when the driver depresses the accelerator.
Risk of loss of immobilisation of the
vehicle.
There is a risk of accidents.
– If there is a fault, the © warning
light illuminates on the instrument
panel accompanied by the “Check
parking brake” message and, in
}
some cases, the
warning
light.
Please contact an authorised dealer
as soon as possible.
– If there is an assisted parking brake
fault, the warning light ® comes
on, along with the message “Braking
system fault”, a beep and, in some
cases, the warning light
Contact an authorised dealer.
Never leave your vehicle
without moving the selector lever to position P or N.
This is because when the
vehicle is stationary with the engine
running and a gear engaged, the
vehicle may begin to move if you
accelerate.
Operating faults
}
.
This means that you must stop as
soon as traffic conditions allow.
If no lights or sounds are apparent, this indicates a fault
in the instrument panel. This
indicates that it is essential
to stop immediately (as soon as traffic conditions allow). Ensure that the
vehicle is correctly immobilised and
contact an approved Dealer.
It is therefore essential to
immobilise the vehicle by
engaging first gear (manual
gearbox) or position P (automatic gearbox). If the slope requires it, chock the vehicle.
2.19
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (1/5)
Fuel consumption is accredited in accordance with a standard regulatory
method. Identical for all manufacturers, this enables vehicles to be compared with one another. Consumption
in real time depends on vehicle usage
conditions, the equipment fitted and the
user’s driving style. To optimise fuel
consumption, please refer to the following advice.
Depending on the vehicle, you will have
various functions which enable you to
lower your fuel consumption:
– the rev counter with ECO zone;
– gear change indicator;
– the driving style indicator;
– the journey record and eco-driving
advice via the multimedia screen;
– ECO mode.
If fitted on the vehicle, the navigation
system provides additional information.
A
B
2
2
1
On the instrument panel A
or B
Depending on the vehicle, the information display can be organised and customised based on the instrument panel
customisation style selected from the
multimedia screen.
The rev counter with ECO zone 1
Driving in the ECO zone helps you optimise fuel consumption under most circumstances.
2.20
1
Gear change indicator 2
Depending on the vehicle, to obtain optimum consumption levels, a warning
light on the instrument panel lets you
know the best time to move up or down
a gear:
Š
‰
move up a gear;
move down a gear.
If you regularly follow this indicator, you
will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consumption.
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (2/5)
4
This indicates:
– average fuel consumption;
– number of miles/kilometres travelled;
– number of miles/kilometres saved.
This corresponds to driving without
fuel consumption (deceleration and/
or foot off the accelerator pedal).
An overall rating from 0 to 100 is displayed to let you assess your eco driving performance. The higher the rating,
the lower the fuel consumption.
Eco advice is given to help improve
your performance.
3
Driving style indicator 3
Informs you about the driving style
adopted in real time. You will be notified
by indicator 3.
The more petals there are on indicator 3, the smoother and more economical your driving.
If you regularly monitor this indicator,
you will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consumption.
The driving style indicator is activated
by default. If you wish to deactivate it,
please see the multimedia system instructions.
If you regularly follow this indicator, you
will reduce your vehicle’s fuel consumption.
With your favourite journeys saved,
you can compare your performance
between trips and the performance of
other vehicle users.
For more information, please see the
multimedia system instructions.
On the multifunction screen
Journey record
Once the engine is switched off, you
will see “Journey record” displayed on
the screen 4, enabling you to view information relating to your last journey.
2.21
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (3/5)
ECO mode
ECO mode is a function which optimises fuel consumption. This acts on
all power consuming elements (engine
power, switching gears for vehicles
fitted with an automatic gearbox, heating and/or air conditioning, etc.).
Limiting acceleration enables low fuel
consumption in urban and surrounding
areas. Reduced usage of the air conditioning reduces fuel consumption without affecting heating comfort.
Free wheel in ECO mode
Depending on the vehicle, for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox,
switching to “free wheel” is favoured to
slow down the vehicle without using the
engine brake. By releasing the accelerator pedal completely to anticipate deceleration, you will save fuel.
Activating the function
The function can be activated:
4
5
– by pressing switch 6.
– by pressing the switch 7 (please refer
to the information on “Multi-Sense” in
Section 3);
6
– from the navigation menu on the
multimedia screen (please refer to
the multimedia instructions).
7
The distance covered in “free wheel”
mode is displayed, depending on the
vehicle, on the multifunction screen 4
or the instrument panel 5.
To activate/deactivate the “free wheel”
mode, see “Vehicle settings customisation menu” in Section 1.
comes on on
The warning light
the instrument panel to confirm activation.
While driving, it is possible to leave the
ECO mode temporarily in order to improve engine performance.
For this, depress the accelerator pedal
firmly and fully.
ECO mode is reactivated when you
take pressure off the accelerator pedal.
Disabling the function
Press switch 6.
goes out on
The warning light
the instrument panel to confirm deactivation.
2.22
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (4/5)
Driving advice, Eco-driving
– Do not overrev the engine in the intermediate gears.
You should always use the highest
gear possible.
– Avoid sudden acceleration.
– Brake as little as possible. If you anticipate an obstacle or bend in advance, you may then simply release
the accelerator pedal.
– Do not try to maintain the same
speed up a hill, accelerate no more
than you would on flat ground. Keep
your foot in the same position on the
accelerator pedal.
– Double declutching and accelerating
before switching off are unnecessary
in modern vehicles.
– Bad weather, flooded roads:
Do not drive through
floods if the water is
above the lower edge of
the wheel rims.
Behaviour
– Drive carefully for the first few miles
until the engine reaches its normal
operating temperature, rather than
let it warm up while the vehicle is stationary.
– Speed is expensive.
– Dynamic driving with a lot of frequent
acceleration and braking is expensive on fuel in comparison to the time
saved.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only
use mats suitable for the
vehicle, attached with the
pre-fitted components, and check
the fitting regularly. Do not lay one
mat on top of another.
There is a risk of wedging the
pedals
2.23
DRIVING ADVICE, ECO-DRIVING (5/5)
– In vehicles fitted with air conditioning, it is normal to observe an
increase in fuel consumption (especially in urban conditions) when it is
used. For vehicles fitted with manual
air conditioning, switch off the system
when it is not required.
Recommendations for reducing
consumption and therefore helping to preserve the environment:
–
Tyres
Advice on use
– An underinflated tyre increases fuel
consumption.
– Opt for the highest speed pressure
or the pressure recommended to optimise fuel consumption indicated
on edge of the driver’s door (please
refer to the information on “Tyre inflation pressure” in Section 4).
– The use of non-recommended tyres
can increase fuel consumption.
– Favour the ECO mode.
– Electricity is fuel; switch off all the
electrical components which are
not really needed. However (safety
first), keep your lights on when the
visibility is bad (“see and be seen”).
– Use the air vents. Driving with the
windows open at 60 mph (100 km/h)
will increase fuel consumption by
4%.
– Never fill the fuel tank right to the
brim to avoid overflow.
2.24
–
–
–
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few moments to let the hot air escape before
starting the engine.
Do not leave an empty roof rack
fitted to the vehicle.
It is better to fit a trailer for bulky objects.
When towing a caravan, fit a wind
deflector and adjust it carefully.
Avoid using the car for door-to-door
calls (short journeys with long waits
in between) because the engine
never reaches its normal operating
temperature.
MAINTENANCE AND ANTIPOLLUTION ADVICE
Your vehicle complies with criteria for
recycling and recovering vehicles at the
end of their service life which will come
into force in 2015.
Some parts of your vehicle have therefore been designed to facilitate future
recycling.
These parts are easy to remove so
that they can be recovered and reprocessed by recycling companies.
By virtue of its design, moderate fuel
consumption and initial settings, your
vehicle also conforms to current antipollution regulations. The manufacturer is actively striving to reduce pollutant exhaust gas emissions and to
save energy. But the fuel consumption
of your vehicle and the level of pollutant
exhaust gas emissions are also your
responsibility. Ensure that it is maintained and used correctly.
Maintenance
It is important to remember that failure to respect anti-pollution regulations
could lead to legal action being taken
against the vehicle owner.
In addition, replacing engine, fuel
supply system and exhaust components with parts other than those originally recommended by the manufacturer may alter your vehicle so that it
no longer complies with anti-pollution
regulations.
Have your vehicle adjusted and
checked by an authorised dealer, in accordance with the instructions given in
your maintenance schedule: they will
have all the equipment necessary for
ensuring that your vehicle is maintained
to its original standard.
Engine adjustments
– Spark plugs: for optimum conditions of use, output and performance
the specifications laid down by our
Design Department must be strictly
applied.
If the spark plugs have to be changed,
use the make, type and gap specified
for your vehicle’s engine. Contact an
authorised dealer for this.
– Air filter, fuel filter: a choked element will reduce efficiency. It must
be replaced.
– Ignition and idle speed: no adjustment is needed.
Exhaust gas monitoring
system
The exhaust gas monitoring system will
detect any operating faults in the vehicle’s antipollution system.
If this system malfunctions, toxic substances may be released into the atmosphere or damage may occur.
This warning light on the instrument panel will indicate if
there are any faults in the system:
This lights up when the ignition is
switched on and goes out when the
engine is started.
Ä
– If it lights up continuously, consult an
approved Dealer as soon as possible;
– if it flashes, reduce the engine speed
until the light stops flashing. Contact
an authorised dealer as soon as possible.
2.25
ENVIRONMENT
Your vehicle has been designed with
respect for the environment in mind for
its entire service life: during production,
use and at the end of its life.
This commitment is illustrated by the
Renault eco² signature.
Manufacture
Your vehicle has been manufactured at
a factory which complies with a policy
to reduce the environmental impact
on the surrounding areas (reduction of
water and energy consumption, visual
and noise pollution, atmospheric emissions and waste water; sorting and reusing waste).
Emissions
Your vehicle has been designed to
emit fewer greenhouse gases (CO2)
while in use, and therefore to consume
less fuel (e.g. 140 g/km, equivalent to
1494.6 mpg (5.3 l/100 km) for a diesel
vehicle).
Our vehicles are also equipped with a
particle filter system including a catalytic converter, an oxygen sensor and
an active carbon filter (the latter prevents vapour from the fuel tank being
released into the open air).
For certain diesel vehicles, this system
also has a particle filter to reduce the
volume of soot particles emitted.
Please make your own
contribution towards
protecting the environment
too
– Worn parts replaced in the course of
routine vehicle maintenance (vehicle battery, oil filter, air filter, batteries, etc.) and oil containers (empty or
filled with used oil) must be disposed
of through specialist organisations.
2.26
– At the end of the vehicle’s service
life, it should be sent to approved
centres to ensure that it is recycled.
– In all cases, comply with local legislation.
Recycling
Your vehicle is 85% recyclable and
95% recoverable.
To achieve these objectives, many of
the vehicle components have been designed to enable them to be recycled.
The materials and structures have
been carefully designed to allow these
components to be easily removed and
reprocessed by specialist companies.
In order to preserve raw material resources, this vehicle incorporates numerous parts made from recycled plastics or renewable materials (vegetable
or animal-derived materials such as
cotton or wool).
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (1/3)
1
2
3
Resetting the standard level
for the tyre pressures
This should be done:
– when the standard tyre pressure
needs to be changed to adapt to
usage conditions (empty, carrying a
load, motorway driving, etc.);
– after swapping a wheel (however
this practice is not recommended);
– after changing a wheel.
It should always be done after checking
the tyre pressure of all four tyres when
cold.
If the vehicle is equipped with the function, this system monitors the tyre pressure.
Tyre pressures must correspond to the
current usage of the vehicle (empty,
carrying a load, motorway driving, etc.).
Resetting procedure
With the ignition on:
– repeatedly and briefly press control 2 to select the tyre pressure display and, depending on the vehicle,
the “Tyre pressure” function;
– press and hold (around 3 seconds)
the button 2 to launch the reset. The
flashing tyres followed by the messages “Learning TP initiated” and
then “Tyres location in progress” indicates that the reset request for the
tyre pressure reference value has
been acknowledged.
Reset can take several minutes of driving.
Operating principle
If the resetting is followed by short
trips, the message “Tyres location in
progress” can remain displayed after
successive restarts.
Each wheel (except for the emergency
spare wheel) has a sensor in the inflation valve which periodically measures
the tyre pressure.
Note
The standard tyre pressure cannot be
less than that recommended and indicated on the door frame.
The system displays the current pressures on the instrument panel 1 and
alerts the driver in the event of insufficient pressure.
Resetting can also be done from the
multifunction screen 3 if your vehicle is fitted with a navigation system.
Select the menu “Vehicle”, “Tyre
pressure”.
2.27
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (2/3)
“Puncture”
A wheel B is shown, depending on the
vehicle, in red or white accompanied
1
A
by the warning light 4
fixed, the
message “Puncture” and a beep.
This message appears along with the
® warning light. They indicate that
the affected wheel is punctured or severely underinflated. Replace it or contact an approved dealer if it is punctured. Top up the tyre pressure if the
wheel is deflated.
4
B
“Check tyre pressure sensors”
A wheel A disappears, the warning
Display
The display 1 and the warning light 4
on the instrument panel warn
you of any tyre pressure faults (flat tyre,
punctured tyre, system fault, etc.).
“Adjust tyre pressure”
A wheel B is shown, depending on the
vehicle, in orange or white accompa-
nied by the warning light 4
fixed
and the message “Adjust tyre pressure”. They indicate that a wheel is deflated.
Check and, if necessary, readjust the
pressures of the four wheels when cold.
For your safety, the warning
light ® requires you
to stop immediately as soon
as traffic conditions allow.
The warning light 4
a few minutes’ driving.
goes off after
light 4
flashes for several seconds then comes on continuously and
the message “Check tyre pressure sensors” appears.
This message appears along with the
© warning light. They indicate that
at least one wheel is not fitted with sensors (e.g. emergency spare wheel).
Otherwise, consult an authorised
dealer.
The sudden loss of pressure in a tyre (burst tyre, etc.) cannot be detected by the
system.
2.28
TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (3/3)
“Tyres location in progress”
Replacing wheels/tyres
This message “Tyres location in
progress” appears when driving if one
or more wheels have been fitted with
sensors not recognised by Renault.
This system requires specific equipment (wheels, tyres, hubcaps, etc.).
Please see the information on “Tyres”
in Section 5.
Contact an approved Dealer to fit new
tyres and to find out about available accessories compatible with the system
and available from your dealer network: the use of any other accessory
could affect the correct operation of the
system or damage a sensor.
Consult an approved dealer
Readjustment of tyre
pressures
The tyre pressures should be adjusted when cold (please refer to the
label located on the edge of the driver’s
door). If the tyre pressures cannot be
checked when the tyres are cold, the
recommended pressures should be increased by 0.2 to 0.3 bar (3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Emergency spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with an emergency spare wheel, it will not have a
sensor.
Tyre repair product and
inflation kit
Because the valves are specially designed, only use equipment approved
by the approved network. Please refer
to “Tyre inflation kit” in Section 5.
Changing a wheel
The system may take several minutes depending on
use for the new wheel positions and pressures to be recognised; check the tyre pressures after
all operations.
This function is an additional driving aid.
However, the function is
not intended to replace the
driver. It cannot, therefore, under
any circumstances replace the vigilance or the responsibility of the
driver. Check the tyre pressures, including the emergency spare wheel,
once a month.
2.29
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (1/10)
ABS (anti-lock braking
system)
– ABS (anti-lock braking system);
– ESC (electronic stability control)
with understeer control and traction control;
Under heavy braking, the ABS prevents
the wheels from locking, allowing the
stopping distance to be managed and
keeping control of the vehicle.
– emergency brake assist;
– active emergency braking;
– hill start assistance;
– rear wheel steering.
Other driving assistance systems are
detailed on the following pages.
These functions are an additional aid in the event of
critical driving conditions,
enabling the vehicle behaviour to be adapted to suit the driving
conditions.
However, the functions do not take
the place of the driver. They do
not increase the vehicle’s limits
and should not encourage you
to drive more quickly. Therefore,
they can under no circumstances
replace the vigilance or responsibility of the driver when manoeuvring
the vehicle (the driver must always
be ready for sudden incidents which
may occur when driving).
2.30
Under these circumstances, the vehicle can be steered to avoid an obstacle
whilst braking. In addition, this system
can increase stopping distances, particularly on roads with low surface grip
(wet ground etc.).
You will feel a pulsation through the
brake pedal each time the system is
activated. The ABS does not in any way
improve the vehicle's physical performance relating to the road surface and
roadholding. It is still essential to follow
the rules of good driving practice (such
as driving at a safe distance from the
vehicle in front etc.).
In an emergency, apply firm and
continuous pressure to the brake
pedal. There is no need to pump
it repeatedly. The ABS will modulate the force applied in the braking
system.
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (2/10)
Operating faults:
x
–
© and
–
,
, © and ® lit
up on the instrument panel alongside
the message “Braking system fault”:
this indicates a fault in the braking
system.
lit up on the instrument panel alongside messages “Check ABS”, “Check braking
system” and “Check ESC”: indicates
the ABS, ESC and emergency brake
assist are deactivated. Braking is
always enabled;
xD
In both cases, consult an approved
dealer.
Warning light ® requires you to stop immediately, for your own safety,
as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Switch off the engine and do not restart it. Contact an approved Dealer.
Your braking systems
are partially operational.
However, it is dangerous
to brake suddenly and
it is essential to stop immediately,
as soon as traffic conditions allow.
Contact an approved dealer.
2.31
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (3/10)
Electronic stability control
ESC with understeer control
and traction control
Electronic stability control ESC
This system helps you to keep control
of the vehicle in critical driving conditions (avoiding an obstacle, loss of grip
on a bend, etc.).
Operating principle
A sensor in the steering wheel detects
the direction selected by the driver.
Other sensors throughout the vehicle
measure the actual direction.
The system compares driver input to
the actual trajectory of the vehicle and
corrects the trajectory if necessary by
controlling the braking of certain wheels
and/or engine power. In the event that
the system is engaged, indicator light
2.32
flashes on the instrument panel.
Understeer control
Operating faults
This system optimises the action of the
ESC in the case of pronounced understeer (loss of front axle road holding).
When the system detects an operating fault the message “Check ESC” and
Traction control
This system helps to limit wheelspin of
the drive wheels and to control the vehicle when pulling away accelerating or
decelerating.
Operating principle
Using the wheel sensors, the system
measures and compares the speed of
the drive wheels at all times and slows
down their over-rotation. If a wheel is
starting to slip, the system brakes automatically until the drive supplied becomes compatible with the level of grip
under the wheel again.
The system also adjusts the engine
speed to the grip available under the
wheels, independently of the pressure
exerted on the accelerator pedal.
warning light © and
appear
on the instrument panel.
In this case, the ESC and traction control system are deactivated. Consult an
authorised dealer.
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (4/10)
Emergency brake assist
Braking anticipation
This system supplements the ABS
and helps reduce vehicle stopping distances.
Depending on the vehicle, when you
rapidly release the accelerator, the
system anticipates the braking manoeuvre in order to reduce stopping
distances.
Operating principle
The system is for detecting an emergency braking situation. In this case,
the braking assistance immediately develops maximum power and may trigger ABS regulation.
ABS braking is maintained as long as
the brake pedal is applied.
Hazard warning lights switching on
Depending on the vehicle, these may
light up in the event of sudden deceleration.
Special cases
When using the cruise control:
– if you use the accelerator, when you
release it, the system may be triggered;
– if you do not use the accelerator, the
system will not be triggered.
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating fault the message “Check braking system” appears on the instrument
panel along with the © warning
light.
Consult an approved dealer.
2.33
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (5/10)
If the driver depresses the brake pedal
and the system still detects a risk of collision, the brake force is increased.
If the driver fails to react following
an alert of an imminent collision, the
system activates the brakes.
2
1
Active emergency braking
Operation
Using the sensor 1, the system calculates the distance separating the vehicle from the one in front and alerts the
driver if there is a risk of a front-end collision. The driver can then brake the vehicle to limit the damage arising from a
collision.
When driving (speed between 18.6 and
86.8 mph (30 and 140 km/h)), if there
is a risk of collision with the vehicle in
front, depending on the vehicle:
Note: Make sure that the sensor 1 is
not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
– the warning light
is displayed
in red on the instrument panel, accompanied by a beep;
or
– the indicator 2 is displayed in red on
the instrument panel and, depending
on the vehicle, on the head up display, accompanied by a beep.
2.34
The system only detects vehicles
driving in the same direction of traffic. The system cannot detect motorcycles because of the difficulty in
forecasting their trajectory.
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (6/10)
Press the switch 5 OK again to activate
or deactivate the function:
=
<
3
4
5
6
function activated
function deactivated
The warning light
is displayed on
the instrument panel when the system
is deactivated.
This system is reactivated each time
the ignition is switched on.
Conditions for non-activation of the
system
Activating or deactivating the
system
For vehicle not fitted with a
navigation system
For vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu,
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving assistance” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
– repeatedly press control 6 up or down
until you reach the “Active braking”
menu, then press the switch 5 OK.
On the multifunction screen 3, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assistance”, and “Active braking”, and then
choose “ON” or “OFF”.
The system cannot be activated:
– when the gear lever is in neutral;
– when the parking brake is activated;
– while cornering.
You can access menu “Driving assistance” directly from button 4
.
2.35
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (7/10)
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
warning light lights up
fault, the
on the instrument panel, with the message “Active braking disconnected”.
There are two possibilities:
– The system is temporarily experiencing difficulties (for example: sensor
obscured by dirt, mud, snow, etc.)
in this case, park the vehicle and
switch off the engine. Clean the detection zone of the radar. When you
next start the engine, the warning
light and the message go out;
– If this is not the case, this may arise
from another cause; contact an
Approved Dealer.
Active emergency braking
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not
under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its
operation will consequently be affected. Deactivate the function, then consult
an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar is located (repairs, replacements, touching up of paintwork) must be carried out by a qualified professional.
Only an authorised dealer is qualified to service the system.
In the event of system disturbance
Some conditions can disturb or damage the operation of the system, such as:
– a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.);
– poor weather conditions (snow, hail, black ice, etc.).
Risk of inadvertent braking.
2.36
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (8/10)
Active emergency braking
Limitation of the system operation
– The system will only respond to vehicles which are moving or which have been sensed as moving.
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.
– The system cannot respond to small vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles as effectively as to other vehicles.
Deactivating the function
The function should be deactivated if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the front of the vehicle has undergone an impact or been damaged;
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns).
Halting the function
You can halt the active braking function at any time by tapping the accelerator pedal or by turning the steering wheel in a avoidance manoeuvre.
If the driver notices any unusual behaviour in the system, please consult an authorised dealer.
2.37
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (9/10)
Hill start assistance
Depending on the gradient of the incline, this system assists the driver
when starting on a hill. It prevents the
vehicle from rolling backwards by automatically applying the brakes when
the driver lifts his/her foot off the brake
pedal to depress the accelerator pedal.
System operation
It only operates when the gear lever is
in a position other than neutral (other
than N or P for automatic transmissions) and the vehicle is completely
stationary (brake pedal depressed)
The system holds the vehicle for approximately 2 seconds. The brakes are
then released (the vehicle will move according to the slope).
2.38
The hill start assistance
system cannot completely
prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards in all situations (extremely steep gradients,
etc.).
In all cases, the driver may depress
the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards.
The hill start assistance function
should not be used for prolonged
stops: use the brake pedal.
This function is not designed to immobilise the vehicle permanently.
If necessary, use the brake pedal to
stop the vehicle.
The driver must remain particularly
vigilant when driving on slippery or
low-grip surfaces and/or on hills.
Risk of serious injury.
DRIVER CORRECTION DEVICES AND AIDS (10/10)
A
B
Operating faults
– If the © warning light, together
with the message “Check power
steering”, is displayed on the instrument panel: please contact an authorised dealer.
– If the warning light ®, together
with the message “Power steering
fault”, is displayed on the instrument
panel, this indicates a fault in the
system.
Rear wheel steering
On equipped vehicles, this system,
when the vehicle is being driven, steers
the rear wheels according to driving
conditions: at low speed this system
offers manoeuvrability, at higher speeds
it optimises stability.
When driving at low speeds, the rear
wheels steer in the opposite direction to
the front wheels (figure A) to increase
the vehicle’s manoeuvrability. This is
used when driving in towns, on winding
roads, during parking manoeuvres, etc.
When driving at higher speeds, the rear
wheels steer in the same direction as
the front wheels (figure B) to optimise
the vehicle’s stability. This is useful
when changing lanes or when cornering etc.
Note: The system configuration (agility, etc.) depends on the mode selected
in the “Multi-sense” menu (please refer
to the information on “Multi-sense” in
Section 3).
Dealer.
® requires you to stop
as soon as traffic conditions
allow. Contact an approved
An impact to the underside of the
vehicle (e.g.: striking a post, raised
kerb or other street furniture) may
result in damage to the vehicle (e.g.:
deformation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
2.39
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (1/3)
This system notifies the driver when
they accidentally cross a continuous or
broken line.
This function uses a camera attached
to the windscreen, behind the rear-view
mirror.
–
–
–
–
–
–
This function is a driving aid in the event of the accidental crossing of
a continuous or broken line in the road. However, the function is not intended to replace the driver. The function can be disrupted under certain
conditions, including:
poor visibility (rain, snow, fog, dirty windscreen, glare of the sun, partially obscured road lines, etc.);
roads with tight bends;
closely following a vehicle in the same lane;
worn road markings, difficult to distinguish or spaced very widely apart;
narrow roads;
...
In this case, the line visibility indicators remain uncoloured on the instrument
panel to indicate that the function will not operate (lines not detected).
Under no circumstances should this function replace the driver’s care or responsibility whilst performing manoeuvres.
2.40
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (2/3)
1
2
3
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 1: select
“vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning”, then choose “ON”
or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving assistance” directly from button 2
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
Press the switch 3.
Operation
When the function is activated, the visibility indicators 4 for the left and right
lines are displayed in grey on the instrument panel.
4
5
The function is set to notify the
driver if:
– the vehicle speed is greater than approximately 45 mph (70 km/h);
and
– lines are detected and the visibility
indicators 4 are, depending on the
vehicle, green or white.
The function triggers an alert if a
line is crossed without the direction indicators being activated. The function
alerts the driver by means of a beep
and, depending on the vehicle, the visibility indicators 4 change to red, or the
graphic 5 is displayed on the instrument
panel.
.
2.41
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (3/3)
Adjustment
1
6
7
Conditions for non-activation
of alerts
– Direction indicators activated for less
than around 2 seconds prior to departing from the lane;
– very fast lane departure;
– driving continuously on a line;
– on bends, the function allows for
slightly cutting the bend;
– hazard warning lights activated;
– ...
2.42
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
From the multifunction screen 1, select
“Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”, “Lane
departure warning setting”.
– Volume: adjust the alert volume to
one of five levels;
– sensitivity: adjust the sensitivity level
for line detection. To do this select:
– “Low” line detected upon crossing;
– “Middle” line detected on approach;
– “High” line detected nearby.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 6 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 7 up or
down until you reach the “Driving assistance” menu. Press the switch 6
OK;
– repeatedly press the control 7 up or
down until you reach the Lane departure warning setting menu, then
press the switch 6 OK.
– Volume: adjust the alert volume to
one of three levels;
– “Sensitivity”: adjust the sensitivity
level for line detection. To do this,
select:
– “Low” line detected upon crossing;
– “Average” line detected on approach;
– “high” line detected nearby.
Operating faults
In the event of a malfunction, a message “Lane departure warning check” is
displayed on the instrument panel, and
the visibility indicators for the left and
right lines disappear from the instrument panel.
Consult an approved dealer.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (1/4)
1
A
A
This system alerts the driver to other
vehicles in the detection zone A.
The system is activated when the vehicle’s speed is between approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and 140 km/h
(87 mph).
This function uses sensors 1 installed
in the front and rear bumper of both
sides.
Special feature
Make sure that the sensors are not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
If a sensor is obscured, the message
“Blind spotclean sensor” will appear on
the instrument panel. Clean the sensors.
This function is an additional aid which indicates
other vehicles in the blind
spot area.
It can never in any case be a substitute for care nor for the driver’s
responsibility while in charge of his
vehicle.
The driver should always look out
for sudden hazards during driving:
make sure while manoeuvring that
there are no moving or movable objects (such as a child, an animal, a
pushchair or a bicycle) or small or
narrow obstacles (such as a boulder
or a post) in the blind spot area.
2.43
BLIND SPOT WARNING (2/4)
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the Blind spot
alert menu, then press the switch 4
OK .
2
3
Activation/deactivation
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 2, select
the “vehicle” menu, “Driving assistance”, and “Blind spot alert”, and then
choose “ON” or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving assistance” directly from button 3
.
2.44
4
5
– Press the switch 4 OK again to activate or deactivate the function.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 4 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 5 up or
down until you reach the “Driving assistance” menu. Press the switch 4
OK;
When the engine is started, the system
remembers its position when the ignition was last switched off.
BLIND SPOT WARNING (3/4)
16
B
Display B
6
The function is activated and has not
detected any vehicles.
Display C
C
7
Display D
D
Indicator 6
Operation
An indicator light 6 is located on each
door mirror 7.
This function will indicate:
Note: clean the door mirrors 7 regularly so that the indicator lights 6 can be
seen properly.
First warning: the indicator 6 means
that a vehicle has been detected in the
blind spot.
– when the vehicle speed is between
approximately 30 km/h (19 mph) and
140 km/h (87 mph);
– when another vehicle is in the blind
spot area and travelling in the same
direction as your vehicle.
When the direction indicator is activated, the indicator light 6 flashes when
a vehicle is detected in the blind spot on
the side towards which you are about to
steer. If you cancel the direction indicator, the function will return to the initial
warning (display C).
If another vehicle is being overtaken,
the indicator 6 will be activated only if
that vehicle remains in the blind spot for
more than one second.
Note: The system’s detection range
operates according to a standard
lane width. If you are driving in
narrow traffic lanes, it may detect
vehicles in other lanes.
2.45
BLIND SPOT WARNING (4/4)
6
B
C
Operating faults
If the system detects a fault, the message “Check blind spot alert” is displayed on the instrument panel. Consult
an authorised dealer.
Note: when the engine is started, the
indicator light 6, display B, flashes
three times. It is normal.
D
Conditions for non-function
– If the object is not moving;
– if traffic is heavy;
– the road is winding;
– if front and rear sensors both detect
objects at the same time (e.g. when
passing an articulated lorry).
– ...
– The system’s detection
range operates according
to a standard lane width. If
you are driving in wide traffic lanes, the system might not
be able to detect a vehicle in the
blind spot.
– The system might be disrupted
momentarily if it is exposed to
strong electromagnetic waves
(as beneath high-tension power
lines) or to very poor weather
conditions (heavy rain, snow,
etc.). Remain aware of driving
conditions.
There is a risk of accidents.
2.46
Because sensors have
been installed in the bumpers, any work (repairs, replacements, touching up of
paintwork) must be carried out by a
qualified professional.
SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (1/2)
2
3
1
Using the sensor 1, this function notifies the driver about the time interval
separating them from the vehicle in
front, so they can respect a safe distance between the two vehicles.
Note: make sure that the sensor 1 is
not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
Activating/deactivating the
function
From the multifunction screen 2, select
menu “Vehicle”, “Driving assistance”,
“Distance warning” then choose “ON”
or “OFF”.
The function is activated when the vehicle speed is between about 20 and
125 mph (30 and 200 km/h).
When the engine is started, the function maintains the same status that was
active when the engine was last stopped.
You can access menu “Driving assistance” directly from button 3
This function is an additional driving aid. However,
this function is not under
any circumstances intended to replace the due care and
attention of the driver, who should at
all times be in control of the vehicle.
.
2.47
SAFE DISTANCE ALERT (2/2)
A
4
B
C
D
– C (orange): the time interval falls
between around 1 and 2 seconds (insufficient distance between the two
vehicles);
– D (red): the time interval is less than
or equal to around one second (very
insufficient distance between the two
vehicles).
If the interval between the two vehicles
is less than around 0.5 seconds, warning light 4 will flash on the instrument
panel. Under certain conditions, the
time interval may not be displayed:
– while cornering;
Operation
Upon activating the function, indicator 4
notifies the driver of the distance separating them from the vehicle in front.
– when changing lane;
– if the vehicle in front is sufficiently far
or outside the range of the sensor.
– A (grey): function not operational;
– A (green): no vehicle detected;
– B (green): the time interval is greater
than or equal to around two seconds
(distance between the two vehicles
adapted to your speed);
On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.
2.48
This function is essential if adaptive
cruise control is activated.
The measurement is displayed for information only:
the system performs no
action on the vehicle.
This function is not designed for use
in urban conditions or for a dynamic
driving style (sudden cornering, acceleration, braking, etc.), but rather
for stable driving conditions.
The function does not interact with
the braking system.
The sensor area should be kept
clean and free of any modifications
in order to ensure the proper operation of the system.
Any work in the area where the
radar is located (repairs, replacements, touching up of paintwork)
must be carried out by a qualified
professional.
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (1/3)
Switching on
a
3
b
4
2
1
The speed limiter function helps you
stay within the driving speed limit that
you choose, known as the limit speed.
Press switch 1 on side . Depending
on the vehicle, the warning light or is orange and the message
“Speed limiter” appears on the instrument panel accompanied by dashes to
indicate that the speed limiter function
is activated and waiting to memorise a
limit speed.
To store the current speed, press
switch 2 on side a (+): the limited
speed will replace the dashes.
The minimum stored speed is 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a speed limiter activation, memory
and increase(+);
b decreasing the speed limiter(-).
3 Activation and recall of memorised
limited speed (R).
4 Speed limiter function standby (with
limited speed memory) (O).
If you wish, you can associate the
speed limiter and the “Overspeed
alert” function (please refer to the information on the “Overspeed alert”
in Section 2).
2.49
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (2/3)
a
Varying the limit speed
Exceeding the limit speed
The speed limiter can be changed by
repeatedly pressing switch 2 :
It is possible to exceed the limit speed
at any time. To do this: press the accelerator pedal firmly and fully (beyond
the resistance point).
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
2
While the speed is being exceeded, the
programmed speed displayed on the
instrument panel flashes.
Then, release the accelerator: the
speed limiter function will return as
soon as you reach a speed lower than
the stored speed.
b
Limited speed cannot be maintained
When driving down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
limit speed: the memorised speed will
flash on the instrument panel and an
audible signal sounds at regular intervals to inform you of this situation.
Driving
When a limited speed has been stored
and this speed is not reached, driving is
similar to driving a vehicle without the
speed limiter function.
Once you have reached the stored
speed, no effort on the accelerator pedal will allow you to exceed
the programmed speed except in an
emergency (refer to information on
“Exceeding the limit speed”).
The speed limiter function is
in no way linked to the braking system.
2.50
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: speed limiter function (3/3)
Recalling the limit speed
If a speed has been stored, it can be recalled by pressing switch 3 (R).
a
3
2
4
1
Putting the function on
standby
Switching off the function
The speed limiter function is deactivated if you press switch 1: in this
case a speed is no longer stored. The
switching off, depending on the vehicle,
of the orange warning light or on
the instrument panel confirms that the
function is off.
The speed limiter function is suspended
when you press switch 4 (O). In this
case, the speed limit remains stored
and the message “Memorised” accompanied by this speed appears on the instrument panel.
When the speed limiter is put on
standby, pressing side a (+) on
switch 2 reactivates the function
without taking into account the
stored speed: it is the speed at
which the vehicle is moving that is
taken into account.
2.51
OVERSPEED ALERT (1/3)
1
Operating principle
The system detects speed limit signs
on the side of the road and displays the
speed limit.
It mainly uses information taken from
the camera 1, attached to the windscreen behind the rear-view mirror.
Note: Make sure the windscreen is not
obstructed (dirt, ice, snow, etc.).
For vehicles which are equipped with it,
the system also uses information from
the navigation system.
The overspeed alert with signage panel
recognition notifies the driver that they
are exceeding the speed limit for the
section of road on which they are currently travelling.
Once the speed limiter is activated, you
can adjust the speed limiter indication
displayed by the system.
In the event of exceeding the speed
limit, the sign display is modified (the
characters change to red or the circle
around the sign flashes) no notify you.
On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.
2.52
For vehicles equipped with a navigation
system and if the vehicle is travelling in
a country where the speed units differ
from those of the vehicle, the system
displays the speed limit sign in the unit
of the country, alongside the speed limit
converted to the unit used by the vehicle’s instrument panel.
For countries where the speed limit is
reduced during rainy weather on some
types of roads, on vehicles equipped
with a navigation system, the system
can modify the limited speed after a few
seconds of wiping the windscreen.
Special situations
The system does not take into account
exceptional speed limit measures, such
as peak pollution days.
OVERSPEED ALERT (2/3)
2
3
a
5
6
Varying the limit speed
4
b
Activating/deactivating the
system
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
On the multifunction screen 2, select
the “Vehicle” menu, “Driving assistance”, and “Speed alert settings”, and
then choose “ON” or “OFF”.
You can access menu “Driving assistance” directly from button 3
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the Speed alert
menu, then press the switch 5 OK.
– Press OK to turn the function on or
off.
If the speed limiter notification differs
from the detected speed value, press
and hold the switch 4:
– side a (+) to increase the notification
speed to the detected speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the notification
speed to the detected speed.
With the function activated and depending on local laws, you can activate
the “increased vigilance zones”. The
system will notify you of the distance
separating you from this zone, and
while you are travelling in the zone.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
– With the vehicle at a standstill, press
and hold the switch 5 OK to access
the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving assistance” menu. Press the switch 5
OK;
.
2.53
OVERSPEED ALERT (3/3)
Operating fault
The system cannot detect the speed
limit if:
– the windscreen is not clean;
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not
under any circumstances intended to replace the due care and attention
of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
– the camera is blinded by the sun;
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.
– there is insufficient visibility (night,
fog, etc.);
The system enables maximum speed signs to be detected and does not detect
other traffic signage.
– the signs are not legible (snow, etc.)
or are hidden (by another vehicle or
by trees);
The driver should not, however, ignore signs which are not detected by the system
and should as a priority comply with the traffic signage and the highway code.
– the information taken from the navigation system is not up to date.
2.54
In the event of poor visibility (fog, snow, frost, etc.), it is possible that the system
may not indicate the correct speed to the driver.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of
the system indications.
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (1/4)
4 This control is only activated for vehicles fitted with adaptive cruise
control (refer to the information on
“adaptive cruise control” in section 2).
a 3
2
4
b 5
1
The cruise control function helps you to
maintain your driving speed at a speed
that you choose, called the cruising
speed.
This cruising speed may be set at any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Controls
1 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a cruising speed activation, storage
and increase (+) ;
b decreasing cruising speed (-).
3 Activation with recall of saved cruising speed (R).
5 Switch the function to standby (with
cruising speed saved) (O).
This function is an additional driving aid. However,
the function does not take
the place of the driver.
Therefore, it can under no circumstances replace the driver’s responsibility to respect speed limits and to
be vigilant (the driver must always
be ready to brake). Cruise control
must not be used in heavy traffic, on
undulating or slippery roads (black
ice, aquaplaning, gravel) and during
bad weather (fog, rain, side winds
etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
2.55
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (2/4)
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approx.
20 mph or 30 km/h), press switch 2
side a (+): the function is activated and
the current speed is saved.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes
and cruise control is confirmed by displaying of the cruising speed, the message “Cruise control” and depending on
the vehicle the indicator light , in addition to the indicator light or .
1
Switching on
Press switch 1 on side .
The indicator light or comes on,
lit green, and the message “Cruise control” appears on the instrument panel,
accompanied by dashes to indicate that
the cruise control function is activated
and waiting to store a cruising speed.
If you try to activate the function below
20 mph (30 km/h), the message “Invalid
speed” will be displayed and the function will remain inactive.
a
2
Driving
Once a cruising speed is memorised
and the cruise control function is active,
you may lift your foot off the accelerator pedal.
gency.
2.56
Please note that you are
strongly advised to keep
your feet close to the pedals
in order to react in an emer-
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (3/4)
Exceeding the cruising speed
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal. While it is being exceeded,
the cruising speed flashes on the instrument panel.
a
Then, release the accelerator: after a
few seconds, the vehicle will automatically return to its set cruising speed.
2
b
Cruising speed cannot be
maintained
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by
pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:
When driving down a steep gradient,
the system is unable to maintain the
cruising speed: the stored speed will
flash on the instrument panel information display to inform you of this situation.
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
The cruise control function
is in no way linked to the
braking system.
2.57
CRUISE CONTROL/SPEED LIMITER: cruise control function (4/4)
a 3
2
b 5
Putting the function on
standby
The function is set to standby if you:
– use the switch 5 (O);
– the brake pedal;
– depress the clutch pedal or the shift
into neutral if the vehicle has an automatic gearbox.
The cruising speed is stored and displayed on the instrument panel accompanied by the message “Memorised”.
Standby is confirmed by displaying of
cruising speed in grey and the message “Memorised” and depending on
the vehicle the indicator light going
out.
2.58
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
once you are sure that the road conditions are suitable (traffic, road surface, weather conditions, etc.). Press
switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (30 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled,
activation of the cruise control is confirmed by displaying of the cruising
speed along with the message “Cruise
control” and, depending on the vehicle,
lighting of the indicator light .
NB: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate more rapidly
to reach this threshold.
When the cruise control function is
put on standby, pressing switch 2
side a (+) reactivates the cruise
control function without taking into
account the stored speed: it is the
speed at which the vehicle is moving
that is taken into account.
1
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deactivated if you press switch 1: in this case
a speed is no longer stored. The switching off, depending on the vehicle, of the
green indicator light or of the green
indicator lights and , and of the
associated message on the instrument
panel confirm that it is off.
Putting the cruise control
on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (1/7)
When traffic conditions permit (large
free-flowing road or motorway), the
adaptive cruise control gives you the
option of maintaining a chosen speed,
known as cruise control, adjustable from 30 mph to 85 mph (50 and
140 km/h), while keeping a following
distance from the vehicle in front in the
same lane.
1
The sensor has a range of 120 metres.
Note: The driver should take into account the maximum speed limit in their
location.
Note: The adaptive cruise control can
brake the vehicle up to a third of the
braking capacity. Depending on the
situation, the driver may need to brake
harder.
This function is an additional driving aid. However,
the function does not take
the place of the driver.
Therefore, it can under no circumstances replace the driver’s responsibility to respect speed limits and to
be vigilant (the driver must always
be ready to brake).
Sensor location
Make sure that the sensor 1 is not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
The adaptive cruise control should
not be used in heavy traffic, on
winding or slippery roads (black ice,
aquaplaning, gravel) and during bad
weather (fog, rain, side winds etc.).
There is a risk of accidents.
On equipped vehicles, some information is given on the head-up display.
2.59
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (2/7)
a
3
6
2
b 4
5
Controls
5 Main “On/Off” switch.
2 Controls for:
a cruising speed activation, storage
and increase (+) ;
b decreasing cruising speed (-).
3 Activation with recall of saved cruising speed (R).
4 Switch the function to standby (with
cruising speed saved) (O).
6 Adjusting following distance.
2.60
Switching on
Press switch 5. Indicator light comes on, lit green, and the message
“Adaptive cruise ctrl” appears on the
instrument panel, accompanied by
dashes to indicate that the cruise control function is activated and waiting to
store a cruising speed.
Activating cruise control
At a steady speed (above approx.
30 mph (50 km/h)), press switch 2
side a (+): the function is activated and
the current speed is saved.
The cruising speed replaces the dashes
and cruise control is confirmed by the
appearance of the message “Adaptive
cruise ctrl” and the indicator light .
If you try to activate the function below
31 mph (50 km/h) or above 86.8 mph
(140 km/h), the message “Invalid
speed” is displayed and the function will
remain inactive.
Adjusting the following
distance
Pressing switch 6 multiple times adjusts the following distance.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (3/7)
Driving
Varying the following
distance
Once a cruising speed is memorised
and the cruise control function is active,
you may lift your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If a following distance is stored and a
vehicle travelling slower than yours is
detected by the system in your lane,
your vehicle will brake (with the brake
lights on) and adapt its speed to that of
the vehicle in front, respecting the following distance selected previously.
You can vary the following distance
from the vehicle in front at any time by
pressing switch 6 repeatedly.
a
6
2
b
C
Overtaking
If your speed is lower than the cruise
control and you wish to perform an
overtaking manoeuvre, activating the
direction indicator will provide acceleration enabling the overtaking manoeuvre.
Adjusting the cruising speed
The cruising speed can be changed by
pressing the switch 2 repeatedly:
– side a (+) to increase the speed;
– side b (-) to reduce the speed.
gency.
Horizontal following bars will be displayed on the instrument panel, indicating the following distance selected:
– one bar for a short distance (corresponding to a following time of
around one second);
– two bars for a medium distance;
– three bars for a long distance (corresponding to a following time of
around two seconds).
Choosing the distance should depend
on the traffic, the laws in your country,
and on the weather conditions.
If a vehicle is detected by the system in
your lane, an outline C of a vehicle will
appear above the following bars.
Please note that you are
strongly advised to keep
your feet close to the pedals
in order to react in an emer-
2.61
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (4/7)
Putting the function on
standby
The function is set to standby if:
a
3
– you press switch 4 (O);
– you depress the brake pedal;
– you depress the clutch pedal;
2
– you use the gear lever;
b 4
– the vehicle speed is lower than
25 mph (40 km/h) or over 100 mph
(160 km/h);
– the engine speed is too low or too
high;
Exceeding the cruising speed
– certain driver correction devices and
aids are triggered (ABS, ESC, etc.)
The cruising speed may be exceeded
at any time by depressing the accelerator pedal.
When exceeding this speed, the cruising speed and the following bars show
red and the cruising speed flashes on
the instrument panel: the distance control function is no longer activated.
Then, release the accelerator: cruise
and distance control will automatically
reactivate unless the function has been
set to standby.
In the latter three cases, the message
“Adaptive cruise Adaptive cruise” is displayed on the instrument panel when
the function is set to standby.
2.62
Standby is confirmed by the display of
the cruising speed in grey and the message “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
Returning to the cruising speed
If a speed is stored, it can be recalled,
once you are sure that the road conditions are suitable (traffic, road surface, weather conditions, etc.). Press
switch 3 (R) if the vehicle speed is
above around 30 mph (50 km/h).
When the stored speed is recalled,
activation of the cruise control is confirmed by the illumination of the cruising speed in green, along with the message “Adaptive cruise ctrl”.
When the cruise control function is put
on standby, pressing switch 2 side a
(+) reactivates the cruise control function without taking into account the
stored speed: it is the speed at which
the vehicle is moving that is taken into
account.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (5/7)
Note: if the speed previously stored is
much higher than the current speed,
the vehicle will accelerate to reach this
threshold.
Under certain conditions (coming up
behind a vehicle moving more slowly,
rapid change of lane of vehicles in
front, etc.), the system may not have
time to respond and may emit a beep
alongside the alert D when the situation
requires the driver’s attention, or the
alert E when the situation requires immediate action from the driver.
B
D
E
React accordingly and perform the appropriate manoeuvres.
5
Switching off the function
The cruise control function is deactivated if you press switch 5: in this case
a speed is no longer stored. The green
indicator light and the message
”Adaptive cruise ctrl” on the instrument
panel go out to confirm that the function
is deactivated.
gency.
Please note that you are
strongly advised to keep
your feet close to the pedals
in order to react in an emer-
Putting the cruise control
on standby or switching it
off does not cause a rapid
reduction in speed: you
must brake by depressing the brake
pedal.
2.63
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (6/7)
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the
due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
The driver should always adapt their speed to the traffic conditions, regardless of the system indications.
The system should under no circumstances be taken to be an obstacle detector or an anti-collision system.
System servicing/repairs
– In the event of an impact, the sensor alignment may become changed, and its operation will consequently be affected.
Deactivate the function, then consult an authorised dealer.
– Any work in the area where the radar is located (repairs, replacements, touching up of paintwork) must be carried out by a
qualified professional.
System disturbance
In a complex environment (metal bridge, etc.), the system may be affected.
Risk of inadvertent braking.
2.64
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (7/7)
Limitation of the system operation
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
– A vehicle travelling in the opposite direction will not trigger any alert or any action on the system operation.
– The sensor area should be kept clean and free of any modifications in order to ensure the proper operation of the
system.
Fixed obstacles (vehicles at a standstill, traffic jams, toll booths, etc.) or objects travelling at low speed or of a small size
(motorbikes, bicycles, pedestrians, etc.) may not be detected by the system.
A vehicle entering the same lane will only be detected once it has entered the detection zone. Sudden or late braking may
then take place.
When entering a bend or a curve, it may occur that the sensor temporarily no longer detects the vehicle in front, and this
may lead to acceleration.
When exiting a curve, the detection of the vehicle in front may be affected or delayed. Sudden or late braking may then take
place.
A slower vehicle travelling in an adjacent lane may be detected and cause a slowing down if one of the two vehicles is travelling too close to the lane of the other.
The system is deactivated below around 20 mph (40 km/h). Drivers must react accordingly.
Sudden changes in situation are not instantly taken into account by the system. Drivers must remain vigilant at all times and
under all circumstances.
Deactivating the function
The function should be deactivated if:
– the brake lights are not functioning;
– the front of the vehicle has undergone an impact or been damaged;
– the vehicle is being towed (breakdowns);
– traffic is heavy;
– the vehicle is travelling in a tunnel;
– the vehicle is travelling on a windy road;
– the vehicle is travelling on a slippery road or in poor weather conditions (fog, snow, rain, side winds, etc.).
If the driver notices abnormal system behaviour, please consult an authorised dealer.
2.65
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (1/5)
Operating principle
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumper
measure the distance between the vehicle and an obstacle.
This measurement is indicated by
beeps which become more frequent the
closer you come to the obstacle, until
they become a continuous beep when
the vehicle is approximately 20 to
30 centimetres from the obstacle.
1
This function is an additional aid that indicates the
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle whilst
reversing, using sound signals.
The system detects obstacles to the
front, the rear and the sides of the vehicle.
The parking distance control system
is only activated when the vehicle is
driven at a speed below approximately
6 mph (10 km/h).
2.66
Special features
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indicated by arrows 1 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
Under no circumstances should it
replace the driver’s care or responsibility whilst reversing.
The driver should always look out
for sudden hazards during driving: always ensure that there are
no moving obstacles (such as a
child, animal, pram or bicycle, etc.)
or small, narrow objects such as
stones or posts in your path when
manoeuvring.
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (2/5)
2
A
C
B
Note: the display 2 shows the vehicle
surroundings and emits beeps.
It is necessary to travel a few metres
before the side detection is activated.
If all areas have a grey background, the
whole area around the vehicle is being
monitored:
– A: analysis of the vehicle surroundings in progress;
– B: analysis of the vehicle surroundings carried out
Operation
Most objects located less near the
front, rear and sides of the vehicle are
detected.
Depending on the distance of the obstacle, the frequency of the beep will
be higher while approaching it, and will
become a solid beep around 20 cm for
obstacles to the sides, and 30 cm for
obstacles to the front or rear. Green,
orange and red zones will be displayed
on the display C.
2.67
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (3/5)
If a side obstacle is detected:
D
– the beeps become faster and then
sound continuously as the obstacle
gets nearer. Green, orange and red
zones will be displayed on the display D;
3
Detection of obstacles to the side
Depending on the direction of the
wheels, the system determines the trajectory of the vehicle and notifies the
driver of any risk or otherwise of a collision with an obstacle 3 to the side of
the vehicle.
– if there is no risk of collision, no beep
will sound when approaching the obstacle. Green, orange and red zones
will be displayed interspersed on the
display D.
Note: in the event of a change in trajectory during a manoeuvre, the risk of
collision with an obstacles may be signalled late.
An impact to the underside of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: striking a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: deformation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
2.68
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (4/5)
4
System sound
Enables the system sound to be
chosen.
Deactivating the system sound
Activate or deactivate the parking distance control sound.
5
6
Note: If you deactivate the sound, you
will no longer be notified with beeps
when approaching an obstacle.
Deactivating the system
Activate or deactivate parking distance
control.
Adjustment
You can adjust certain settings from the
multifunction screen 4. Please see the
equipment instructions for further information.
Vehicles fitted with a navigation
system
Select “Vehicle”, “Parking assistance”,
“Obstacle detection”.
Parking distance control audio
volume
Adjust the volume of the parking distance control by pressing + or -.
Vehicles not fitted with a navigation
system
Vehicle stationary:
– press and hold the switch 5 OK to
access the settings menu;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Driving assistance” menu;
– press the switch 5 OK;
– repeatedly press the control 6 up or
down until you reach the “Parking
distance control settings” menu;
– press the switch 5 OK;
– using the control 6, select the settings to be changed;
– press the switch 5 OK.
When the vehicle is being driven at
a speed below approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h), certain noises (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may
trigger the beeping sound of the
parking distance control.
2.69
PARKING DISTANCE CONTROL (5/5)
Automatic deactivation of the
parking distance control
The system deactivates:
– when the vehicle speed is above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h);
– depending on the model, when the
vehicle is stationary for more than
approximately 5 seconds and an obstacle is detected (such as when in a
traffic jam, etc.);
– when the vehicle is in neutral for
manual gearboxes, or in position N
or P for automatic gearboxes.
2.70
Operating faults
When the system detects an operating
fault, a beep sounds for approximately
3 seconds each time reverse gear is selected and is accompanied by the message “Check parking sensor” shown on
the instrument panel. Please consult an
authorised dealer.
REVERSING CAMERA (1/2)
3
4
C
2
B
1
A
Operation
3 moving guide line:
Moving into reverse gear, the camera 1
located on the tailgate provides a view
of the area behind the vehicle on the
multimedia screen 2, accompanied by
one or two moving or fixed guide lines 3
and 4.
This is shown in blue on the multifunction screen 2. It indicates the vehicle
trajectory according to the position of
the steering wheel.
This system is initially used with the aid
of several gauges (mobile for trajectory
and fixed for distance). When the red
zone is reached, use the bumper image
to stop accurately.
The fixed clearance gauge comprises
coloured markers A, B and C, indicating the distance behind the vehicle:
Fixed gauge 4
This gauge remains fixed and indicates
the vehicle trajectory if the wheels are
in line with the vehicle.
Special feature
Make sure that the camera is not obscured (by dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
– A (red) approximately 30 centimetres
from the vehicle;
– B (yellow) approximately 70 centimetres from the vehicle;
– C (green) approximately 150 centimetres from the vehicle.
2.71
REVERSING CAMERA (2/2)
You can also adjust the camera image
settings (brightness, contrast, etc.)
2
Activating, deactivating the
reversing camera
From the multifunction screen 2, select
“Vehicle”, “Settings”, “Parking assistance”, then “Rear view camera”.
Activate or deactivate the reversing
camera and confirm your choice.
The screen shows a reverse mirror
image.
The frames are a representation
projected onto flat ground; this information must not be taken into
account when superimposed on a
vertical object or an object on the
ground.
Objects which appear on the edge
of the screen may be deformed.
In very bright light (snow, vehicle in
sunshine etc.), the camera vision
may be adversely affected.
If the boot is open or poorly closed,
the message “Boot open” appears
and the camera display disappears.
2.72
This function is an additional
aid. It cannot, therefore,
under any circumstances
replace the vigilance or the
responsibility of the driver.
The driver should always look out
for sudden hazards during driving:
always ensure that there are no
moving obstacles (such as a child,
animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small,
narrow objects such as stones or
posts in your path when manoeuvring.
ASSISTED PARKING (1/4)
2
3
1
This function assists with parking manoeuvres.
Take your hands off the steering wheel.
You only control the pedals and the
gear lever.
You can retake control at any time by
operating the steering wheel.
Switching on
Special features
With the vehicle at a standstill or driving
at less than approximately 18.6 mph
(30 km/h), press switch 1. The warning light integrated on switch 1 lights up
and the 2 screen appears on the multifunction screen.
Ensure that the ultrasonic sensors indicated by arrows 3 are not obscured (by
dirt, mud, snow, etc.).
2.73
ASSISTED PARKING (2/4)
Choice of manoeuvre
Operation
The system can perform four types of
manoeuvres:
Parking
– parallel parking;
– perpendicular parking;
– angle parking;
– moving out of a parallel parking
space.
From the multifunction screen, select
the manoeuvre to be performed.
Note: When starting the vehicle, or
after successfully completed parallel
parking using the system, the default
manoeuvre proposed by the system is
assistance in exiting a parallel parking
space. In other cases, the default manoeuvre can be set from the multifunction screen.
Your speed should not exceed around 4
mph (7 km/h).
As long as the vehicle speed is less
than 20 mph (30 km/h), the system
looks for available parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle.
Once a space has been found, it is displayed on the multifunction screen, indicated by a small letter “P”. Drive slowly,
with the indicators activated on the side
of the space, until the message “Stop”
is displayed, alongside a beep.
The space is then indicated on the multifunction screen by a capital “P”.
– Stop the vehicle;
– select reverse gear.
lights up on the inWarning light
strument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
– follow the system instructions provided on the multifunction screen.
2.74
on the
Once the warning light
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.
ASSISTED PARKING (3/4)
Your speed should not exceed around
4 mph (7 km/h).
Once in position to exit the space, the
system will notify you of the end of the
manoeuvre.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.
1
Suspending the manoeuvre
Exiting a parallel parking space
– Select “exit parallel parking space”
mode;
– activate the direction indicator on the
side you wish to go out of;
– press and hold switch 1 (around
2 seconds).
Warning light
lights up on the instrument panel, along with a beep.
– release the steering wheel;
– go forwards and backwards using
the parking distance control system
alerts.
The manoeuvre is suspended in the following circumstances:
– you take control of the wheel;
– a door or the boot is opened;
– the vehicle is at a standstill for too
long;
– an obstacle in the direction of movement prevents the manoeuvre from
being completed;
– the engine will stop.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been suspended. Then to resume the manoeuvre, press and hold the system activation switch.
In this case, the reason for suspending
the manoeuvre will be displayed on the
multifunction screen.
Make sure:
– you have released the steering wheel
and;
– that all doors and the boot are closed,
and;
– that no obstacles are in the way of
the direction of movement, and;
– that the engine is started.
Cancelling the manoeuvre
The manoeuvre can be stopped in the
following cases:
– by pressing the system activation
switch;
– the vehicle speed has exceeded
4 mph (7 km/h);
– You have performed more than ten
forwards/backwards movements in
one manoeuvre;
– the parking distance control sensors
are dirty or blocked;
– the vehicle wheels have skidded.
Once the warning light
on the
instrument panel goes off and a beep
sounds, the manoeuvre has been completed.
2.75
ASSISTED PARKING (4/4)
This function is an additional driving aid. However, this function is not under any circumstances intended to replace the
due care and attention of the driver, who should at all times be in control of the vehicle.
Make sure that the manoeuvre complies with the applicable traffic regulations at your location.
– The driver should always look out for sudden hazards during driving: always ensure that there are no moving obstacles
(such as a child, animal, pram, bicycle, etc.) or small, narrow objects such as stones or posts in your path when manoeuvring.
– The system cannot detect objects located in the sensor blind spots.
– During manoeuvring, the steering wheel may turn quickly: do not place your hands inside the wheel, and ensure nothing is
located in this space.
– Always visually check that the parking space proposed by the system is still available and contains no obstacles.
– The system should be deactivated when towing a trailer.
2.76
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (1/3)
B
1
3
2
3
A
Selector lever 1
Operation
P: park
With the selection lever 1 in position P,
switch on the ignition.
R: reverse
D: automatic mode
To move out of position P, you must depress the brake pedal before pressing
the unlocking button 2.
M: manual mode
With your foot on the brake pedal (warn-
+: upper gear
on the display goes out),
ing light
move the lever out of position P.
N: Neutral
–: lower gear
The gear engaged is displayed on the
instrument panel B and on the display A.
Note: Press button 2 to go from position D or N to R or P.
Ó
Gear shift paddles 3
(depending on the vehicle)
The paddles 3 enable you to change
gear while the gear lever is in “manual
mode” position or, if driving, in “automatic mode” position.
P, N and R are not accessible using the
paddles.
Only engage D or R when the vehicle is stopped, with your foot on the
brake and the accelerator pedal released.
2.77
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (2/3)
Driving in automatic mode
Put lever 1 into position D.
In most road conditions you will encounter, you will not need to touch your
lever again: the gears will change automatically at the right time and at the
most suitable engine speed because
the automatic system takes into account the vehicle load and road contour
and adjusts itself to the particular driving style you have chosen.
Economical driving
When driving, always leave the lever
in position D, keeping the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed to ensure automatic gear changes at a lower engine
speed.
Accelerating and overtaking
Depress the accelerator pedal firmly
and fully (so that it goes beyond the
kickdown point).
This will enable you to change down
to the optimum gear within the
engine range.
Driving in manual mode
With the selector lever in position D,
move the lever to the left into the M position. Shifting the lever or the paddles
repeatedly allows you to change gears
manually:
– to move down through the gears,
push the lever forwards or press the
left-hand paddle;
– to move up through the gears, push
the lever backwards or press the
right-hand paddle.
The gear selected is displayed on the
instrument panel.
Special circumstances
– If the bends and road surface do
not allow you to stay in automatic
mode (e.g. in the mountains), we
recommend that you change to
manual mode. This will prevent the
automatic gearbox from changing
gear repeatedly when climbing, and
permit engine braking on long descents.
Special cases
In certain driving conditions (for example, engine protection, operation of the
Electronic Stability Programme: the automatic system may change gear automatically. Likewise, to prevent incorrect
manoeuvres, a gear change may be refused by the automatic system: in this
case the gear display flashes for a few
seconds as a warning.
When facing uphill, to remain
stopped, do not keep your foot on
the accelerator.
Risk of overheating the automatic
gearbox.
2.78
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (3/3)
Parking the vehicle
Operating faults
When the vehicle is stopped, move the
lever to position P while keeping your
foot on the brake pedal: the gearbox is
in neutral and the drive wheels are mechanically locked by the driveshaft.
– when driving, if the “CHECK AUTO
GEARBOX ” message appears on
the instrument panel, it indicates a
fault.
Apply the handbrake or, depending
on the vehicle, ensure that the electronic parking brake is applied.
Contact your approved Dealer as
soon as possible;
– when driving, if the message
“Gearbox overheating” appears on
the instrument panel, stop as soon
as possible to let the gearbox cool
down and wait for the message to
disappear;
– If a vehicle with an automatic
gearbox breaks down, refer to the
information on “Towing” in Section 5.
An impact to the underside of the vehicle while
manoeuvring (e.g.: striking a post, raised kerb or
other street furniture) may result in
damage to the vehicle (e.g.: deformation of an axle).
To avoid any risk of accident, have
your vehicle checked by an approved Dealer.
2
4
When activated, in the event that the
lever is stuck in P, depress the brake
paddle. It is possible to free the lever
manually. To do this, unclip the base of
the lever, then insert a tool (rigid rod)
into the slot 4 and press simultaneously
on the button 2 in order to unlick the
lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
For safety reasons, do not
switch off the ignition before
the vehicle has come to a
complete standstill.
2.79
2.80
Section 3: Your comfort
multi-Sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual air conditioning/heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning: information and advice on use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside air quality and deodorisation functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visor/blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passenger compartment storage/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear bench seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear parcel shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment storage space/fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting objects in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting objects: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multimedia equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
3.4
3.6
3.9
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.23
3.26
3.28
3.29
3.33
3.33
3.33
3.34
3.35
3.36
3.37
3.38
3.39
3.40
3.40
3.41
3.42
3.1
MULTI-SENSE (1/2)
The Multi-Sense system acts, depending on the mode selected and depending on the vehicle, on the drive, the
light environment, the comfort and the
engine noise:
– modes Comfort , Neutral, Eco and
Sport are preset and associated with
customisable light environments and
engine noise;
– mode Perso is fully customisable.
Mode Eco
Multi-Sense
Eco
Sport
Neutral
Comfort
Perso
Please refer to the information on
“Driving advice, Eco-driving” in
Section 2.
The drive modes affect the:
– power-assisted steering;
– the rear wheel steering;
– engine and gearbox responsiveness;
– heating level.
They also affect the:
– the light environment and the instrument panel lighting;
– instrument panel and multifunction
screen information;
– engine noise;
– massage seat.
After each start-up, the vehicle uses the
mode set at the time the engine was
last switched off.
Mode Eco is geared towards saving
energy and the environment. The
steering is smooth, engine and gearbox
management enable fuel consumption
to be lowered. Air conditioning is managed to be used only when necessary.
Note: for vehicles without ECOmode,
the Comfort mode becomes the most
suitable mode in terms of energy economy and respect for the environment.
Mode Comfort
This mode favours smooth steering. The interior environment is softened. Depending on the vehicle, the
seat massage function is activated.
Depending on the vehicle, the seat
massage function is activated.
Mode Neutral
Default mode, mode Neutral selects the
vehicle factory settings.
In all modes, it is possible to change
the colour of the ambient lighting as
well as the format of the information
displayed on the instrument panel
and multifunction display. You can
also reset to the default settings.
Please refer to the multimedia
equipment instructions.
3.2
MULTI-SENSE (2/2)
Sport mode
This mode permits an increased responsiveness from the engine and the
gearbox. The steering is firmer.
1
3
Note: depending on the vehicle, this
mode may inhibit the Stop And Start
mode (refer to the information on the
“Stop and Start Function” in Section 2).
Mode Perso
This mode enables you to manually
configure the drive, comfort, light environment and engine noise.
2
Accessing the menu
Stopping the engine in Sport
mode, or Perso mode with engine
setting in Sport mode.
When you restart the vehicle, a message asks you if you wish to keep
the engine setting in Sportmode.
You can access Multi-Sense, depending on the vehicle:
– from the multifunction screen 1.
Select menu “Vehicle” then “MultiSense”;
– using switch 2;
– depending on the vehicle, by pressing the button 3 Eco which automatically launches the Eco mode, or
by pressing the button 3 R.S Drive
which automatically launches the
Sportmode. In both cases this opens
the “Multi-Sense” menu on the multifunction screen 1 for a few seconds.
Depending on the vehicle, once the
“Multi-Sense” menu is displayed on
the multifunction screen 1, pressing
switch 2 enables you to move between
the two preferential modes you have
selected. Refer to the handbook for the
equipment.
3.3
AIR VENTS: air outlets (1/2)
1
3
2
1
4
2
5
6
5
7
1 side window demister outlets
2 side air vents
3 windscreen demister outlet
8
7
4 centre air vents
5 footwell heater outlets for front passengers
6 multifunction screen
3.4
7 footwell heater outlets for rear passengers
8 centre console air vents
AIR VENTS: air outlets (2/2)
8
8
10
9
9
Front seats
11
Air flow
Turn control knob 9:
Direction
Right/left direction
Move cursor 8.
Up/down direction
Move cursor 8.
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
to : maximum air flow;
Rear seats
Right/left direction
Move cursor 11.
to : closed.
Up/down direction
To remove bad odours from your vehicles, only use the systems designed
for this purpose. Consult an approved
Dealer.
Move cursor 11.
Air flow
Turn control knob 10:
up: maximum flow;
down: closed.
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
3.5
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (1/3)
1
2
3
4
A
5
8
7
Indicators
1 Adjusting the air temperature.
The following indicators are displayed
on the multimedia screen A:
3 Air conditioning.
4 Air recirculation.
5 Adjusting air distribution in the passenger compartment.
6 Adjusting the ventilation fan speed.
7 Adjusting the ventilation speed and
stopping the system.
3.6
10 11
6
The controls
2 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
9
8 Air temperature.
9 Active mode.
10 Fan speed.
11 Distribution of air in the passenger
compartment.
Switching air conditioning on
or off
The air conditioning is switched on (indicator light on) or off (indicator light off)
using the control 3.
The air conditioning system is used
for:
– lowering the temperature inside the
passenger compartment;
– eliminating condensation more
quickly.
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (2/3)
Distribution of air in the
passenger compartment
There are five air distribution options.
Turn control 5 to choose the distribution
option.
4
5
The air distribution is displayed on the
multimedia screen.
The air flow is directed to the
windscreen and the front side
window demisting vents.
õ
÷
The air flow is distributed between all the air vents, the
front side window demisting vents, the
windscreen demisting vents and the
footwells.
ó
G
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
J
All the air flow is directed to the
dashboard vents.
The air flow is directed towards
the dashboard air vents, the
front footwells and, depending on the
vehicle, the second row footwells.
Switching the air
recirculation on
Press the control 4: the integrated indicator light in the button comes on.
Under these conditions, air is taken
from the passenger compartment and
is recirculated, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle.
Air recirculation is for:
– isolating the vehicle from the external atmosphere (driving in polluted
areas, etc.);
– lowering the passenger compartment temperature as quickly as possible.
Prolonged use of air recirculation can lead to condensation forming on the side
windows and windscreen, and discomfort due to the use of non-renewed air in
the passenger compartment. We therefore advise you to return to normal mode
(external air) as soon as the air recirculation function is no longer required, by
pressing the control 4 again.
3.7
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING (3/3)
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
1
2
5
With the engine running, press the
control 2. The operating tell-tale comes
on.
This function permits rapid demisting/
de-icing of the rear screen and de-icing
of the door mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
7
6
Varying the ventilation speed
Adjusting the air temperature
You can adjust the fan speed by pressing the controls 6 or 7 to increase or
reduce the fan speed.
Turn control 1 to obtain the desired
temperature. The more bars are displayed on the multimedia screen, the
higher the temperature.
When the air conditioning system is
used for long periods, it may begin to
feel cold. To increase the temperature,
turn control 1 to the right.
The system is deactivated (OFF): the
ventilation speed is zero (vehicle stationary).
You may, however, feel a slight flow of
air when the vehicle is moving.
3.8
To exit this function, press the control 2 again.
Demisting automatically stops.
Stopping the system
To switch off the system, press the
control 7 several times until the message “OFF” appears on the multimedia
screen.
You may, however, feel a slight flow of
air when the vehicle is moving.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (1/5)
A
8
1
9
Climate
Automatic mode
10
19
18
2
7
6 5
4 3
17
16
15
14
13
11
12
13
Controls A
11 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
Press zone 14 to access the multifunction screen controls 1. The presence of
the controls detailed below will depend
on the vehicle model.
12 Passenger compartment air distribution.
2 and 7 Left and right temperature indication adjustment.
3 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
4, 8, 9 and 10 automatic modes
13 Right and left temperature display.
14 Zone displaying air conditioning settings.
15 “DUAL” function.
16 “Automatic recirculation” function.
The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passenger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme conditions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air conditioning and air temperature.
This mode consists of a choice of three
programmes:
NORMAL : allows the selected comfort
level to be best attained, depending on
the exterior conditions. Press button 4
or key 9.
SOFT: reaches the desired comfort
level more gently and silently. Press
button 8.
FAST: increases the flow of air in the
passenger compartment. This mode
is recommended in particular to optimise comfort in the rear seats. Press
button 10.
17 Air conditioning.
19 Stopping the system.
5 Air recirculation.
6 “Clear View” function.
Some buttons have a warning light
indicating their operative state.
3.9
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (2/5)
8
19
9
Climate
Note: The air conditioning configuration depends on the mode selected in
the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer to
the information on “Multi-Sense” in section 3).
10
20
18
11
2
7
4
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses
the most suitable amount of air to reach
and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the ventilation speed
by pressing buttons 10 or 17 or by sliding your finger in zone 20.
15
14
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
– uniform passenger compartment
setting;
– DUAL function setting to independently adjust the left and right sides.
Uniform passenger compartment
setting
Use control 7.
DUAL function setting
Press button 15 to activate. Use control 7 to adjust the left side and control 2
for the right side.
3.10
The displayed temperature values
show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increasing or decreasing the value displayed will not allow the comfort level to be reached any more
quickly. The system will always optimise the temperature increase or
decrease (the ventilation system
does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dashboard air vents should remain open.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (3/5)
8
9
Climate
To exit this function, press either:
10
– button 4;
– again button 6;
– on button 8, 9 or 10.
20
18
6
11
4 3
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and deices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It
imposes automatic operation of the
air conditioning and rear screen de-icing and, depending on the vehicle, the
windscreen electric de-icer.
Press button 6 – the integrated indicator light comes on.
Press button 3 to stop the heated rear
screen operating, and the integrated indicator goes out.
To adjust the ventilation speed: press
buttons 11 or 18 or slide your finger in
zone 20.
3.11
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (4/5)
8
9
Climate
10
19
17
4
3
Switching air conditioning on
or off
In automatic mode, the system switches
the air conditioning system on or off,
depending on the climate conditions.
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
Press button 3 – the integrated indicator light comes on. This function enables rapid demisting or de-icing of the
rear screen and de-icing of the door
mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
To exit this function, press button 3
again. Demisting automatically stops.
14
Stopping the system
Press button 19 to activate or deactivate the system (the operating warning light on button 19 notifies you of the
system status).
Press button 17 to:
– activate the air conditioning (a warning light in zone 14 comes on).
– deactivate the air conditioning (the
warning light in zone 14 goes out)
It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes NORMAL, SOFT or
FAST.
In automatic mode (4 warning light is lit), all air conditioning functions are controlled by the system.
You can still modify the system’s choice; in this case, the warning light in the
button 4 goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press one of the programmes NORMAL 9, SOFT 8
or FAST10 or the button 4.
3.12
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls A (5/5)
Automatic usage
Climate
Press button 16 (a warning light comes
on in zone 14).
Manual use
Press button 5 to force air recirculation.
16
5
Adjusting the distribution
of air in the passenger
compartment
Press buttons 12 to select the desired
distribution (a warning light is displayed
in zone 14):
The air flow is mainly directed
to the demisting vents for the
windscreen and the side windows.
Ø
½
¿
The air flow is mainly directed
to the dashboard air vents.
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
12
14
Air recirculation
This function is managed automatically
but you can also activate it manually.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
We advise you to return to automatic
mode as soon as air recirculation is no
longer needed, by pressing key 16 or
button 5 again.
To exit this function, press key 16 or
button 5 again.
Note:
– during recirculation, air is taken from
the passenger compartment and
is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle;
– air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be cut off (when
driving in polluted areas, etc.) and
to cool the passenger compartment
temperature more quickly.
The demisting/de-icing will still take
priority over the air recirculation.
3.13
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (1/5)
1
B
2
3
4
2
3
4
The automatic climate control system
guarantees comfort in the passenger compartment and good visibility
(except in the event of extreme conditions), while optimising consumption.
The system controls the ventilation
speed, air distribution, air recirculation,
and starting and stopping the air conditioning and air temperature.
4
4
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 5
10
Automatic mode
1
C
6
9
8
7
Controls B and C
5 and 11 Left and right temperature indication adjustment.
6 De-icing/demisting of the rear screen
and, depending on the vehicle, the
door mirrors.
7 Passenger compartment air distribution.
8 “Automatic recirculation” function.
9 Air recirculation.
10 “Clear View” function.
12 and 18 Ventilation speeds.
13 “DUAL" function.
14, 15 and 16 Automatic modes.
17 Air conditioning.
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 5
10
6
9
8
7
Indicators
The following indicators are displayed
on the screen 3:
1 Active mode, ventilation speed and
air distribution in the passenger compartment (temporary display after
pressing the associated controls).
2 Outside air temperature.
4 Air temperature, left and right.
Some buttons have a warning light
indicating their operative state.
3.14
This mode consists of a choice of three
programmes:
AUTO: allows the selected comfort
level to be best attained, depending
on the exterior conditions. Press the
button 15.
SOFT: reaches the desired comfort
level more gently and silently. Press the
button 14.
FAST: increases the flow of air in the
passenger compartment. This mode is
recommended in particular to optimise
comfort in the rear seats. Press the
button 16.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (2/5)
Note: The air conditioning configuration depends on the mode selected in
the “Multi-Sense” menu (please refer to
the information on “Multi-Sense” in section 3).
11 12 13
18 5
11 12 13
18 5
19
Varying the ventilation speed
In automatic mode, the system uses
the most suitable amount of air to reach
and maintain the desired comfort level.
You can still adjust the ventilation
speed by pressing buttons 12 or 18 or,
depending on the vehicle, by sliding
your finger in zone 19.
Temperature adjustment
There are two types of settings:
– uniform passenger compartment
setting;
– DUAL function setting to independently adjust the left and right sides.
Uniform passenger compartment
setting
Use control 11.
DUAL function setting
Press button 13 to activate. Use control 11 to adjust the left side and control 5 for the right side.
The displayed temperature values
show a comfort level.
When starting the engine, increasing or decreasing the value displayed will not allow the comfort level to be reached any more
quickly. The system will always optimise the temperature increase or
decrease (the ventilation system
does not start instantly at maximum
speed: it gradually increases). This
may take several minutes.
Generally speaking, unless there is
a particular reason not to, the dashboard air vents should remain open.
3.15
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (3/5)
To exit this function, press either:
– again button 10;
– one of the buttons 14, 15 or 16.
12
10
14 15 16
19
12
18
6
Clear View function
This function quickly demists and deices the windscreen, the rear screen,
the front side windows, and the door
mirrors (depending on the vehicle). It
imposes automatic operation of the
air conditioning and rear screen de-icing and, depending on the vehicle, the
windscreen electric de-icer.
3.16
10
14 15 16
18
6
Press button 10 – the integrated indicator light comes on.
Press button 6 to stop the heated rear
screen operating, and the integrated indicator goes out.
To adjust the ventilation speed: press
buttons 12 or 18 or slide your finger in
zone 19.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (4/5)
Rear screen de-icing/
demisting
1
Press button 6 – the integrated indicator light comes on. This function enables rapid demisting or de-icing of the
rear screen and de-icing of the door
mirrors (on equipped vehicles).
1
12
14 15 16 17
12
6
Switching air conditioning on
or off
In automatic mode, the system switches
the air conditioning system on or off,
depending on the climate conditions.
To exit this function, press button 6
again. Demisting automatically stops.
14 15 16 17
6
Stopping the system
To switch the system off, press
button 12 repeatedly until the message
OFF appears in zone 1.
Press button 17 to:
– activate the air conditioning (a warning light in zone 1 comes on).
– deactivate the air conditioning (the
warning light in zone 1 goes out)
It is preferable to use one of the automatic programmes AUTO, SOFT or
FAST.
In automatic mode (indicator light on button 14, 15 or 16 lit), all air conditioning
functions are controlled by the system.
You can still modify the system’s choice; in this case, the indicator light on the
button 14, 15 or 16 goes out.
To return to automatic mode, press one of programmes AUTO 15, SOFT 14 or
FAST 16.
3.17
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL: Controls B and C (5/5)
Automatic usage
1
Press button 8 (a warning light comes
on in zone 1).
Manual use
1
Press button 9 to force air recirculation.
Prolonged use of this position may lead
to odours, caused by non-renewal of
air, and the formation of condensation
on the windows.
9
8
7
Adjusting the distribution
of air in the passenger
compartment
Press buttons 7 to select the desired
distribution (a warning light is displayed
in zone 1):
The air flow is mainly directed
to the demisting vents for the
windscreen and the side windows.
Ø
½
¿
The air flow is mainly directed
to the dashboard air vents.
The air flow is directed mainly
towards the footwells.
9
8
7
Air recirculation
This function is managed automatically
but you can also activate it manually.
We advise you to return to automatic
mode as soon as air recirculation is no
longer needed, by pressing button 8 or
button 9 again.
To exit this function, press button 8 or
button 9 again.
Note:
– during recirculation, air is taken from
the passenger compartment and
is recycled, with no air being taken
from outside the vehicle;
– air recirculation allows the external atmosphere to be cut off (when
driving in polluted areas, etc.) and
to cool the passenger compartment
temperature more quickly.
The demisting/de-icing will still take
priority over the air recirculation.
3.18
AIR CONDITIONING: information and advice on use
Advice on use
Fuel consumption
Operating faults
In some situations, (air conditioning
off, air recirculation activated, ventilation speed at zero or low, etc.) you may
notice that condensation starts to form
on the windows and windscreen.
You will normally notice an increase in
fuel consumption (especially in town)
when the air conditioning is operating.
As a general rule, contact your approved dealer in the event of an operating fault.
For vehicles fitted with air conditioning
with no automatic mode, switch off the
system when it is not required.
– Reduction in de-icing, demisting
or air conditioning performance.
This may be caused by the passenger compartment filter cartridge becoming clogged.
If there is condensation, use the “Clear
View” function to remove it, then use
the air conditioning in automatic mode
to stop it forming again.
Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Document
for your vehicle for the inspection frequency.
Advice for reducing consumption
and helping to preserve the environment
Drive with the air vents open and the
windows closed.
If the vehicle has been parked in the
sun, open the doors for a few moments
to let the hot air escape before starting
the engine.
– No cold air is being produced.
Check that the controls are set correctly and that the fuses are sound.
Otherwise, switch off the system.
Presence of water under the
vehicle
After prolonged use of the air conditioning system, it is normal for water
to be present under the vehicle. This is
caused by condensation.
Do not add anything to the
vehicle’s ventilation circuit
(for example, to remove
bad odours).
Do not open the refrigerant fluid circuit. The fluid
may damage eyes or skin.
There is a risk of damage or of
fire.
3.19
OUTSIDE AIR QUALITY AND DEODORISATION FUNCTION
Deodorisation function
This reduces unpleasant odours in the
passenger compartment.
Deodorization cycle
A
– ON: helps to reduce the unpleasant
odour more quickly in the passenger
compartment,
– OFF: stop the function.
Note:
The function is on a timer. It stops automatically after a few minutes.
With the air conditioning switched
on, from the screen A, select Menu,
Vehicle, Take care.
Outside air quality
The air quality is given using a graph on
the multifunction screen.
Three colours indicate the air quality
level (from the cleanest to the most
polluted):
1 blue
2 light grey
3 grey
Please refer to the multimedia instructions for further information.
3.20
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (1/2)
Electric windows
These systems operate:
– with the engine running;
– with the ignition off until one of the
front doors is opened (limited to approximately 12 minutes).
– with the engine off, front doors
closed, after pressing the start
button.
Press the window switch down or pull it
up to lower or raise the window to the
desired height: the rear windows do not
open fully.
1
5
2
4
3
Passenger safety
The driver can prevent the front and rear passenger electric windows
from operating (and the driver’s window) by pressing switch 4. A confirmation message is displayed on the instrument panel.
6
From the driver’s seat, use switch:
1 for the driver’s side;
2 for the front passenger side;
3 and 5 for the rear passenger windows.
From the passenger seats, use
switch 6.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle with the RENAULT card or key inside, and never leave
a child, adult who is not self-sufficient or a pet, even for a short while. They may
pose a risk to themselves or to others by starting the engine or activating equipment (such as the gear lever or electric windows). If any part of the body becomes
trapped, reverse the direction of the window immediately by pressing the relevant
switch.
Risk of serious injury.
Avoid resting any objects against
a half-open window: there is a risk
that the electric window could be
damaged.
3.21
ELECTRIC WINDOWS (2/2)
One-touch mode
Operating faults
This mode works in addition to the operation of the electric windows described
previously.
Briefly press or pull the window switch
fully: the window is fully lowered or
raised. Pressing the switch again stops
the window moving.
In case of a fault when closing a
window, the system reverts to normal
mode: pull the switch as many times as
necessary until the window closes completely, hold the switch (still on the closing side) for around one second, then
completely lower then raise the window
to reset the system.
Note: if the window detects resistance
when closing (e.g.: branch of a tree,
etc.) it stops and then lowers again by a
few centimetres.
Remote control window closing
(vehicles with 4 one-touch electric windows).
When you lock the doors from the outside, press the locking button on the
RENAULTcard twice in quick succession, or on the driver’s door in
hands-free mode, and all the windows
will close automatically (and, depending on the vehicle, the sunroof).
It is recommended that the user only
operates the system when the vehicle can be seen clearly and no one is
inside.
If necessary, contact an approved
Dealer.
Manual window winder
controls
Turn the handle 7.
When closing the windows,
ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Risk of serious injury.
3.22
7
ELECTRIC SUNROOF (1/3)
1
A
2
B
C
0
4
D
3
1
To slide the curtain 1
To slide the sunroof
– to open: push the handle 2 rearwards to move the blind to the desired position;
– To tilt: move the marked position 3
to position A.
– to close: pull the handle 2 forwards
to move the blind to the desired position.
– to open: move the marked position 3 to position B, C or D depending on the type of opening required;
– to close: move the marked position 3 to position 0.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle
with the RENAULT card
inside, and never leave a
child who is not self-sufficient or a
pet, even for a short while.
The reason for this is that the child
may endanger himself or others by
starting the engine, activating equipment such as the window winders
for example, or locking the doors.
If something gets trapped, reverse
the direction of travel as soon as
possible by turning button 4 fully to
the right (position D).
Risk of serious injury.
3.23
ELECTRIC SUNROOF (2/3)
Closing the sunroof by
remote control
If you press the locking button on
the card twice in quick succession
RENAULT,, the windows and the electric sunroof will close automatically.
A
It is recommended that the user only
operates the system when the vehicle can be seen clearly and no one is
inside.
B
C
0
4
D
3
Special features
If the vehicle is equipped
with this function, this action
will activate deadlocking.
Your vehicle is fitted with an anti-pinch
facility: when the sunroof encounters
resistance whilst closing (branch of
a tree, etc.), it stops and then moves
back a few centimetres.
Refer to the information on
“RENAULT card: deadlocking” or
“Radiofrequency remote control:
deadlocking” in section 1.
After closing the sunroof by remote
control, pressing button 4 allows the
sunroof to return to its previous position.
Check that there is no-one still
inside the vehicle
When closing the sunroof,
ensure that no part of the
body (arm, hand, etc.) is
protruding from the vehicle.
Risk of serious injury.
3.24
ELECTRIC SUNROOF (3/3)
Precautions during use
– Vehicle with loaded roof bars.
As a general rule, if there is a load
on the roof, use of the sunroof is not
recommended.
A
B
C
0
D
3
4
Operating faults
If the sunroof will not close, move the
marked position 3 to position 0 then
press button 4 until the sunroof is completely closed: consult an approved
dealer.
Before using the sunroof, check the
objects and/or accessories (bike
racks, roof boxes, etc.) attached to
the roof bars: they should be properly arranged and secured and
should not interfere with the operation of the sunroof.
Contact an approved dealer for details of possible conversions;
– check that the sunroof is properly
closed before leaving your vehicle;
– clean the seal every three months
using products recommended by our
Technical Department;
– do not open the sunroof immediately after it has rained or immediately after washing the vehicle.
Driver’s responsibility
Never leave your vehicle
with the RENAULT card
inside, and never leave a
child who is not self-sufficient or a
pet, even for a short while.
The reason for this is that the child
may endanger himself or others by
starting the engine, activating equipment such as the window winders
for example, or locking the doors.
If something gets trapped, reverse
the direction of travel as soon as
possible by turning button 4 fully to
the right (position D).
Risk of serious injury.
Important: during this operation, the
sunroof anti-pinch function is deactivated. Contact your approved
Dealer as soon as possible.
3.25
INTERIOR LIGHTING (1/2)
1
2
3
4
Map reading lights
Courtesy light
Press switch 1 to get:
Press switch 3 for:
– permanent lighting;
– permanent lighting;
– immediate switching off.
– intermittent lighting, which comes
on when a door is opened. It only
switches off after a time delay and
when the doors concerned have
been closed correctly;
Note: for vehicles fitted with a navigation system, you can use the multifunction screen to deactivate/activate the
courtesy lights which come on when
the doors or boot are opened. To do
this, please refer to “Vehicle settings
customisation menu” in Section 1.
– lighting switches off immediately.
Map reading lights
Press switches 2 and 4.
3.26
When the doors or boot are unlocked and opened, the reading and
footwell lights come on temporarily.
INTERIOR LIGHTING (2/2)
6
5
Glove box light 5
Boot lights
Light 5 comes on when the cover is
opened.
Light 6 comes on when the luggage
compartment is opened.
With the doors properly shut, locking or starting the engine makes the
interior lights and the courtesy lights
go out.
3.27
SUN VISOR, BLINDS
1
2
3
4
Front sun visor
Ticket holder 4
Lower the sun visor 1 on the windscreen or unclip it and lower it over the
side window.
Can be used to hold motorway toll tickets, maps, etc.
Vanity mirror
Lift the cover 3.
The light 2 switches on automatically.
When driving, ensure the
courtesy mirror cover is
closed. Risk of injury.
3.28
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (1/4)
1
2
Door pockets 1
It can hold a bottle.
Passenger storage
compartment
Pull handle 2 to open it.
The glove box can hold A4-size documents, a large bottle of water, etc.
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage compartments in such
a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning or
braking.
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
3.29
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (2/4)
3
6
4
6
3
3
5
Central storage
compartment 4
Cup holders 6
Slide the curtain 5 to open the storage
compartment.
It may house a sliding cup holder
system.
Central storage
compartment 3
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the receptacle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of burning if hot liquid
escapes.
3.30
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage compartments in such
a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning or
braking.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (3/4)
9
10
7
Central storage
compartment 8
With the sliding armrest 7 in its rearmost position, raise it.
8
Grab handle 9
This offers support and can be held
when the vehicle is being driven.
Do not use it for getting into or out of
the vehicle.
Clothes hooks 10
Nothing should be placed
on the floor area in front of
the driver as such objects
may slide under the pedal
during braking manoeuvres, thus
obstructing its use.
3.31
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT STORAGE SPACE AND FITTINGS (4/4)
12
11
Rear door storage
compartment 11
14
13
Front seat storage pockets 12
Rear armrest with cup holder
Lower armrest 14.
Rear central storage
compartment 13
Ensure that no hard, heavy
or pointed objects are
placed in the “open” storage compartments in such
a way that they may fall onto passengers during sudden turning or
braking.
3.32
When turning corners,
accelerating or braking,
ensure that the receptacle being held by the cup
holder is not dislodged.
There is a risk of burning if hot
liquid escapes.
ASHTRAY/CIGAR LIGHTER/ACCESSORIES SOCKET
1
1
3
2
1
2
Cigarette lighter 1
Ashtray 3
Accessories sockets
With the ignition on, push in cigar
lighter 1, it will spring back with a click
when it is ready. Pull it out to use. After
use, replace it without pushing it all the
way in.
It can be housed in either position 2.
To open, lift the cover. To empty, pull the
ashtray towards you and it will be released from its housing 2.
You can use the one of sockets 1.
They are provided for connecting accessories approved by our Technical
Department.
If your vehicle is not fitted with a
cigar lighter and an ashtray, these
can be obtained from an authorised
dealer.
Connect accessories with
a maximum power of
120 watts (12 V) only.
When several accessory
sockets are used at the same time,
the total power of the connected
accessories must not exceed
180 watts.
Fire hazard.
3.33
REAR HEADRESTS
A
B
1
Position for using the central
headrest A
Central headrest B storage
position
Raise the headrest as far as possible to
use it in the high position. Check that it
is correctly locked.
Press the button 1 and lower the headrest completely.
The headrest is a safety
component; check that it is
fitted and in the correct position. The top of the headrest should be as close as possible
to the top of the head.
3.34
When the headrest is set at the
lowest position, this is for storage
only. It should not be in this position
when a seat is occupied.
To remove a headrest
Raise the headrest as far as it will go,
then press button 1 and remove the
headrest.
To refit a headrest
Insert the rods in the holes, press the
button 1 and lower the headrest. Check
that it is locked correctly.
REAR BENCH SEAT
1
B
A
2
To manually fold down the
seatbacks
Ensure that the front seats are far
enough forward.
Place seat belt in hook 2 to avoid damaging it.
Pull the control 1 and lower the seatback A.
For safety reasons, carry
out any adjustments when
the vehicle is not being
driven.
To replace the seatback, proceed in
the reverse order to removal.
Refit the seatback and click it back into
place.
The configuration of the
two-seat bench with the
small seatback B pulled
down, does not allow the
central seat to be used as it would
be impossible to buckle the seat belt
(belt buckles inaccessible).
When refitting the seatback, make sure it is correctly locked in place.
If seat covers are fitted,
make sure these do not prevent the
seatback latch from locking in.
Make sure that the seat belts are
positioned correctly.
Reposition the headrests.
When moving the rear
seats, ensure that nothing
obstructs the anchorage
points (passenger’s arm or
leg, a pet, gravel, cloth, toys, etc.).
3.35
TAILGATE
2
1
3
Press button 1 and lift the tailgate.
Opening manually from
inside the vehicle
To close
Special note:
Lower the tailgate using the handles 2
inside the tailgate to help you.
If it is impossible to unlock the tailgate,
it can be done from inside.
To open
– access the luggage compartment by
folding forward the seatback(s) of
the rear bench seat,
– insert a pencil or similar object in
cavity 3 and slide the unit as shown
in the illustration,
– push the tailgate to open it.
3.36
The attaching of any carrying device (bike rack, luggage box, etc.) resting on
the luggage compartment
lid is prohibited. To install a carrying
device on your vehicle, contact an
Approved Dealer.
REAR PARCEL SHELF
1
2
Removal
Unhook the two cords 1 (tailgate side).
Lift rear parcel shelf 2 slightly and pull it
towards you.
To refit it, proceed in reverse order to
removal.
Do not place any objects,
especially heavy or hard
objects, on the parcel shelf.
These may pose a risk to
the vehicle occupants if the driver
has to brake suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
3.37
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT STORAGE
3
1
4
2
Storage under the carpet
Bag hooks 3
Anchorage points
To gain access to this, lift the boot
carpet 1 using the tab 2.
Maximum weight per hook: 5 kg.
Attachment points 4
If your vehicle is not equipped with
anchorage points, you can get them
from an authorised dealer.
Always position the heaviest items directly on the floor. Use the lashing
points 4 on the boot floor, if these are fitted to the vehicle. The luggage
should be loaded in such a way that no items will be thrown forward and
strike the occupants if the driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten the rear
seat belts, even if the seats are not occupied.
3.38
Always place objects being transported so that the heaviest items
are resting against the back of the
rear bench seat.
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS IN THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
Always position the objects transported
so that the largest surface is against:
B
– The rear bench seatback for normal
loads (example A).
A
– The front seatbacks with the rear
seatbacks folded down, as is the case
for maximum loads (example B).
B
If you have to place objects on the folded
seatback, it is necessary that you lower
the headrests before folding the seatback so that it can be folded as flat as
possible against the seat.
1
Always position the heaviest items directly on the
floor. Use the lashing
points 1 on the boot floor, if
these are fitted to the vehicle. The
luggage should be loaded in such a
way that no items will be thrown forward and strike the occupants if the
driver has to brake suddenly. Fasten
the rear seat belts, even if the seats
are not occupied.
3.39
TRANSPORTING OBJECTS towbar
A
A: 895 mm.
Permissible nose weight, maximum permissible towing weight,
braked and unbraked: refer to
the information on “Weights” in
Section 6.
Choice and fitting of towing
equipment
Maximum weight of towing equipment: 36 kg
For fitting and conditions of use,
refer to the equipment’s fitting instructions.
If the towbar ball obscures the registration plate or the rear fog lights, it
should be removed when not in use.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documentation.
In all cases, comply with local legislation.
3.40
ROOF BARS
Precautions during use
Handling the tailgate
1
1
Before handling the tailgate, check the
objects and/or accessories (bike rack,
roof box, etc.) fitted to the roof bars:
these must be correctly positioned and
secured, so as not to hinder the operation of the tailgate.
Access to the mounting
points
Open the doors to access the mounting points 1.
For information on the range of
equipment adapted to your vehicle, we advise you to consult an approved Dealer.
Refer to the fitting instructions for information on how to fit roof bars and
conditions of use.
If original roof bars, approved by our Technical
Department, are supplied
with screws, only use these
screws for attaching the roof bars to
the vehicle.
Please keep these instructions with
the rest of the vehicle documentation.
Maximum permissible load on
roof rack: refer to the information
on “Weights” in Section 6.
The attaching of any carrying device (bike rack, luggage box, etc.) resting on
the luggage compartment
lid is prohibited. To install a carrying
device on your vehicle, contact an
Approved Dealer.
3.41
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (1/2)
1
3
2
Multimedia systems
1
2
3
4
Multimedia touchscreen display;
Steering column controls;
Steering wheel controls;
Microphone.
Hands-free telephone
integrated control
For equipped vehicles, use the steering
wheel controls 3.
Using the telephone
Refer to the equipment instructions
for information on how to operate
this equipment.
3.42
We remind you of the need
to conform to the legislation
in force concerning the use
of such equipment.
4
MULTIMEDIA EQUIPMENT (2/2)
The sockets USB can also recharge accessories with a maximum power rating
of 12 Watts (voltage: 5V) per socket,
which have been approved by our
Technical Department.
5
The JACK socket enables the radio to
be used with an auxiliary cable.
Multimedia sockets 5
You can use the USB ports or, depending on the vehicle, the SD card
reader to access the multimedia content of your accessories and the system
update (please refer to the equipment
instructions).
The various sources can be selected
from the multifunction screen and from
the steering column controls.
Connect accessories with a
maximum power of 12 watts
only.
Fire hazard.
3.43
3.44
Section 4: Maintenance
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil level: general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine oil level: topping up/filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Levels: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bodywork maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior trim maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2
4.4
4.5
4.7
4.8
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.10
4.11
4.13
4.15
4.17
4.1
BONNET (1/2)
2
1
3
To open, pull handle 1, located on the
left-hand side of the dashboard.
Unlocking the bonnet catch
To unlock, push tab 3 at the same time
as opening the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
Lift the bonnet, guiding it up, and it
will rest in position with the help of two
struts 2.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
4.2
Do not press down on the
bonnet: there is a risk that
the bonnet may accidentally
close.
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Risk of injury.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out operations in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
BONNET (2/2)
Closing the bonnet
Check that nothing has been left in the
engine compartment.
To close the bonnet again, hold the
bonnet in the middle and guide it down,
allowing a 30 cm gap before it is closed,
then release it. It will latch automatically
under its own weight.
After carrying out any work
in the engine compartment, check that nothing
has been left behind (cloth,
tools, etc.).
These may damage the engine or
cause a fire.
Ensure that the bonnet is
properly locked.
Check that nothing is preventing the catch from locking (gravel, cloth, etc.).
In the event of even a slight
impact involving the radiator grille or bonnet, have the
bonnet lock checked by an
authorised dealer as soon as possible.
4.3
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: general information
It is normal for an engine to use oil for
lubrication and cooling of moving parts
and it is normal to top up the level between oil changes.
B
A
However, contact your approved
Dealer if more than 0.5 litres is being
consumed every 600 miles (1,000 km)
after the running in period.
Oil change frequency: check the oil
level from time to time and certainly
before any long journey to avoid the
risk of damaging your engine.
C
B
A
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Reading the oil level
The oil level should be read with the vehicle on level ground, after the engine
has been switched off for some time.
The dipstick must be used to read
the exact oil level and make sure
that the maximum level has not been
exceeded (risk of engine damage).
Refer to the following pages.
The instrument panel display only
alerts the driver when the oil level is at
its minimum.
4.4
In order to prevent splashback, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling with oil
– remove the dipstick and wipe with a
clean, lint-free cloth;
– push the dipstick in as far as it will
go (for vehicles equipped with a captype dipstick C, screw the cap in as
far as it will go);
– take out the dipstick again;
– read the level: it should never fall
below minimum mark A or exceed
maximum mark B.
Once the operation has been completed, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
Under no circumstances
must the maximum fill
level B be exceeded: risk of damage
to the engine and catalytic converter.
If the oil level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an approved Dealer.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (1/3)
1
1
2
2
Topping up/Filling
– Unscrew cap 1;
The vehicle must be parked on level
ground and the engine should be cold
(for instance, before the engine is
started up for the first time in the day).
– top up the level (as a guide, the capacity between the minimum and
maximum reading on the dipstick 2
is between 1.5 and 2 litres, depending on the engine);
– wait for approximately 20 minutes to
allow the oil to flow into the engine;
1
2
In order to prevent splashing, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling the oil.
– check the level using the dipstick 2
(as described above).
Do not exceed the max level and
do not forget to refit cap 1 and dipstick 2.
Once the operation has been completed, ensure that the dipstick is
pushed in as far as it will go or that
the “cap-type dipstick” is completely
screwed in.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
4.5
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (2/3)
2
1
1
2
Do not exceed the max level and
do not forget to refit cap 1 and dipstick 2.
4.6
In order to prevent splashing, it is
recommended that a funnel be used
when topping up/filling the oil.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL: topping up, filling (3/3)/OIL CHANGE
Oil change
Engine oil grade
Service interval: refer to the
Maintenance Service Booklet for your
vehicle.
Refer to the Maintenance Service
Booklet for your vehicle.
Oil change capacity
Please refer to the maintenance document for your vehicle, or contact an authorised dealer.
Always check the engine oil level using
the dipstick, as explained previously (it
should never fall below the minimum
level, or be over the maximum level on
the dipstick).
When working in the engine
compartment, ensure that
the windscreen wiper stalk
is in the park position.
Filling: take care when
topping up the oil that
no oil drips onto engine
components - risk of fire.
Remember to refit the cap securely
as there is a risk of fire if oil splashes
onto hot engine components.
Risk of injury.
Exceeding the maximum
engine oil level
Under no circumstances
must the maximum fill level
be exceeded: risk of damage to the
engine and catalytic converter.
If the oil level exceeds the maximum
level, do not start your vehicle and
contact an approved Dealer.
Consult your approved Dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out operations in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
Never run the engine in an
enclosed space as exhaust
gases are poisonous.
Engine oil change: if you
are changing the oil when
the engine is hot, be careful
not to scald yourself if the
oil overflows.
4.7
LEVELS (1/3)
1
Checking intervals
Replacement intervals
Check the coolant level regularly
(very severe damage is likely to be
caused to the engine if it runs out of
coolant).
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
If the level needs to be topped up, only
use products approved by our Technical
Department which ensure:
– protection against freezing;
– anticorrosion protection of the cooling system.
Coolant
With the engine switched off and on
level ground, the level when cold must
be between the “MINI" and "MAXI"
marks on coolant reservoir 1.
Top this level up when cold before it
reaches the MIN mark.
Consult your approved dealer at
once if you notice an abnormal or
repeated drop in any of the fluid
levels.
No operations should be
carried out on the cooling
circuit when the engine is
hot.
Risk of burns.
4.8
The engine may be hot
when carrying out operations in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
LEVELS (2/3)
2
Level 2
Topping up
It is normal for the level to drop as
the linings become worn, but it should
never drop below the “MINI” warning
line.
After any operation on the hydraulic circuit, a specialist must replace the fluid.
If you wish to check the disc and drum
wear yourself, you should obtain the
document explaining the checking procedure from our network or from the
manufacturer’s website.
Only use fluids approved by our
Technical Department (and taken from
a sealed container).
Replacement intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Document for
your vehicle.
Brake fluid level
This should be checked frequently, and
any time you notice even the slightest
loss in braking efficiency.
The level should be read with the engine
switched off and on level ground.
If there is an abnormal or repeated
drop in the fluid level, consult an approved dealer.
The engine may be hot
when carrying out operations in close proximity. In
addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
4.9
LEVELS (3/3)/FILTERS
3
Liquid
Filters
Windscreen washer fluid. In winter, use
anti-freeze product. Use products recommended by an authorised dealer.
The replacement of filter elements (air
filter, passenger compartment filter,
diesel filter, etc.) is scheduled in the
maintenance operations for your vehicle.
Note: Do not use pure water (risk of
damage to the priming pump, limescale
building up on the pump and the jets).
Jets
To adjust the windscreen washer jets,
please consult an authorised dealer.
Windscreen washer reservoir
Topping up
With the engine switched off, open
cap 3, fill until you can see the fluid,
then refit the cap.
Note: Regularly check the reservoir
level by topping up the liquid before
taking a trip.
NOTE
Depending on the vehicle, to find
out the fluid level, open cap 3 and
pull out the dipstick.
4.10
Replacement intervals for filter elements: refer to the Maintenance
Document for your vehicle.
BATTERY (1/2)
1
Depending on the vehicle, a system
continuously checks the battery charge
status. If this decreases, the message
“Battery low start engine” is displayed
on the instrument panel. In this case,
start the engine. The message will go
off.
The charge status of your battery can
decrease especially if you use your vehicle:
– for short journeys;
– for driving in town;
– when the temperature drops;
Battery 1 does not require any maintenance. You should not open it or add
any fluid.
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid
which must not come into
contact with the eyes or
skin. If it does, wash the affected
area with plenty of cold water. If
necessary, consult a doctor.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion.
– after extended use of energy-consuming devices (radio, etc.) with the
engine switched off.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
The engine may be hot
during operations in close
proximity. In addition, the
engine cooling fan may
start at any moment.
Risk of injury.
4.11
BATTERY (2/2)
Replacing the battery
A
2
7
3
4
6
5
As this operation is complex, we advise
you to contact an approved Dealer.
Label A
Observe the indications on the battery:
– 2 Naked flames and smoking are forbidden;
– 3 eye protection required;
– 4 keep away from children;
– 5 explosive materials;
– 6 refer to the handbook;
– 7 corrosive materials.
dealer.
4.12
The battery is a specific
type, please ensure it is
replaced with the same
type. Consult an approved
TYRE PRESSURE (1/2)
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
If under-inflated (puncture, low pres-
A
B
A
C
C
D
E
E
E
F
F
F
G
Label A
Open the door to read it.
Tyre pressures should be checked
when the tyres are cold.
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
Never deflate a hot tyre.
B: dimension of the tyres fitted to the
vehicle.
C: intended driving speed.
sure, etc.), the warning light
lights up on the instrument panel;
please refer to “Tyre pressure loss
warning” or “Tyre pressure monitoring
system” in Section 2.
Vehicle used fully laden (Maximum
Permissible All-up Weight) and
towing a trailer
The maximum speed must be limited to
60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure increased by 0.2 bar.
Please refer to the information on
“Weights” in Section 6.
D : recommended pressure for optimising fuel consumption.
NB: driving comfort may be altered.
E: front tyre pressure.
F: rear tyre pressure.
G: tyre pressure for the emergency
spare wheel.
4.13
TYRE PRESSURES (2/2)
Tyre safety and use of snow chains:
Refer to the information on “Tyres” in
Section 5 for the servicing conditions
and, depending on the version, the use
of chains.
For your safety, please respect the speed limit.
When they need to be replaced, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load capacity and speed rating at least
equal to those of the original
tyres, or conform to those recommended by an authorised dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthiness.
Risk of loss of control of the vehicle.
4.14
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (1/2)
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the exterior of the vehicle regularly.
Your vehicle has been treated with very
effective anti-corrosion products. It is
nevertheless subject to various outside
influences.
Corrosive agents in the atmosphere
– atmospheric pollution (built-up and
industrial areas),
– saline atmospheres (near the sea,
particularly in hot weather),
– seasonal and damp weather conditions (e.g. road salt in winter, water
from road cleaners, etc.).
What you should not do
Do not degrease or clean mechanical components (e.g. the engine compartment), underneath the body, parts
with hinges (e.g. inside the doors) and
painted plastic external fittings (e.g.
bumpers) using high-pressure cleaning equipment or by spraying on products not approved by our Technical
Department. Doing this could give rise
to corrosion or operational faults.
Wash the vehicle in bright sunlight or
freezing temperatures.
Do not scrape off mud or dirt without
pre-wetting.
Allow dirt to accumulate on the exterior.
Minor impacts
Allow rust to form following minor impacts.
Abrasive action
Dust and sand in the air, mud, road grit
thrown up by other vehicles, etc.
Do not use solvents not approved by
our Technical Department to remove
stains as this could damage the paintwork.
You should take a number of minor precautions in order to safeguard your vehicle against such risks.
Do not drive in snow or muddy conditions without washing the vehicle, particularly under the wheel arches and
body.
You should
Wash your car frequently, with the
engine off, with cleaning products recommended by the manufacturer (never
use abrasive products). Rinse thoroughly beforehand with a jet:
– spots of tree resin and industrial
grime;
– mud in the wheel arches and underneath the body which forms damp
patches;
– bird droppings, which cause a
chemical reaction with the paint that
rapidly discolours paintwork and
may even cause the paint to peel
off;
wash the vehicle immediately to
remove these marks since it is impossible to remove them by polishing;
– salt, particularly in the wheel arches
and underneath the body after driving in areas where the roads have
been gritted.
Remove any plant matter (resin, leaves,
etc.) from the vehicle regularly.
4.15
BODYWORK MAINTENANCE (2/2)
Respect local regulations about washing vehicles (e.g. do not wash your vehicle on a public highway).
Observe the vehicle stopping distances
when driving on gravelled surfaces to
prevent paint damage.
Repair, or have repaired quickly, areas
where the paint has been damaged, to
prevent corrosion spreading.
Remember to visit the body shop periodically in order to maintain your
anti-corrosion warranty. Refer to the
Maintenance Document.
If it is necessary to clean mechanical components, hinges, etc., spray
them with products approved by our
Technical Department to protect them
after they have been cleaned.
Vehicles with a matte paint
finish
This type of paint requires certain precautions.
Do not do the following
– use wax-based products (polishing);
– rub hard;
– wash the vehicle in a roller-type car
wash;
– wash the vehicle using a high-pressure device;
– attach stickers to the paintwork (risk
of leaving marks).
You should do the following
Wash the vehicle by hand using plenty
of water, using a soft cloth or a gentle
sponge.
Using a roller type car wash
Return the windscreen wiper stalk to
the Park position (refer to the information on the “Windscreen washer, wiper”
in Section 1). Check the mounting of
external accessories, additional lights
and mirrors, and ensure that the wiper
blades are secured with adhesive tape.
Remove the radio aerial mast if your
vehicle is fitted with this equipment.
Remember to remove the tape and refit
the antenna after washing.
Cleaning the headlights
As the headlights are made of plastic
“glass”, use a soft cloth or cotton wool
to clean them. If this does not clean
them properly, moisten the cloth with
soapy water, then wipe clean with a soft
damp cloth or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used.
We have selected special products
to care for your vehicle and you can
obtain these from the manufacturer’s accessory outlets.
4.16
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (1/2)
A well-maintained vehicle will last
longer. It is therefore recommended to
maintain the interior of the vehicle regularly.
Glass instrument panel
A stain should always be dealt with
swiftly.
Use a soft cloth (or cotton wool).
If this does not clean them properly,
use a soft cloth (or cotton wool) slightly
moistened with soapy water and then
wipe clean with another soft damp cloth
or cotton wool.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
Whatever type of stain is on the trim,
use cold (or warm) soapy water with
natural soap.
Detergents (washing-up liquid, powdered products, alcohol-based products) should not be used.
Use a soft cloth.
(e.g.: instrument panel, clock, exterior
temperature display, radio display, multimedia or multifunction display etc.)
Do not use products containing alcohol and/or spray fluids on the area.
Rinse and soak up the excess.
Seat belts
These must be kept clean.
Use products selected by our Technical
Department (Approved outlets) or
warm, soapy water and a sponge and
wipe with a dry cloth.
Detergents or dyes must not be used
under any circumstances.
Textiles (seats, door trim, etc)
Vacuum-clean the textiles regularly.
Liquid stain
Use soapy water.
Dab lightly (never rub) with a soft cloth,
rinse and remove the excess.
Solid or pasty stain
Carefully remove the excess solid or
pasty material immediately with a
spatula (working from the edges to the
centre to avoid spreading the stain).
Clean as for a liquid stain.
Special instructions for sweets or
chewing gum
Put an ice cube on the stain to solidify
it, then proceed as for a solid stain.
For further recommendations for
maintaining the interior, and/or for
any unsatisfactory results, please
see an authorised dealer.
4.17
INTERIOR TRIM MAINTENANCE (2/2)
Removal/replacing removable
equipment originally fitted in
the vehicle
If you need to remove equipment in
order to clean the passenger compartment (for example, mats), always
ensure that they are correctly refitted
and are the right way around (the driver’s mat should be fitted on the driver’s
side, etc.) and fit them with the components supplied with the equipment (for
example, the driver mat should always
be fixed using the pre-fitted mounting
components).
You should not:
You are strongly advised not to position objects such as deodorants,
scents, etc. near air vents, as this could
damage your dashboard trim.
With the vehicle stationary, always
ensure that nothing will impede driving
(anything obstructing the pedals, heel
wedged by the mat etc.).
You are strongly recommended not to use highpressure or spray cleaning
equipment inside the passenger compartment: use of such
equipment could impair the correct
functioning of the electrical or electronic components in the vehicle, or
have other detrimental effects.
4.18
Section 5: Practical advice
Puncture/emergency spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyre inflation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tyres (tyre and wheel safety, use in winter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear lights and side lights (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lighting (changing bulbs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RENAULT card: battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio frequency remote control: batteries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wipers (replacing blades) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2
5.4
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.11
5.14
5.16
5.19
5.21
5.23
5.25
5.26
5.27
5.28
5.30
5.32
5.1
PUNCTURE/EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (1/2)
In case of puncture
Depending on the vehicle, a tyre inflation kit or emergency spare wheel is
provided (refer to the following pages).
Special note
The Tyre Pressure Monitor function
does not check the emergency spare
wheel (the wheel replaced by the emergency spare wheel disappears from the
instrument panel display).
Refer to the information on the “Tyre
pressure monitoring system” in
Section 2.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.
5.2
If the emergency spare wheel has been stored for several years, have it
checked by your Dealer to ensure that it is safe to use.
Vehicles fitted with an emergency spare wheel smaller than the
four other wheels:
– Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel to the same vehicle.
– As the punctured wheel is wider than the emergency spare wheel, the vehicle’s
ground clearance is reduced.
– Replace the emergency spare wheel as soon as possible with a wheel with the
same dimensions as the original.
– When this is fitted to the vehicle, which must only be a temporary measure, the
driving speed must not exceed the speed indicated on the label on the wheel.
– Fitting an emergency spare wheel may alter the way the vehicle usually runs.
Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration and reduce your speed when cornering.
– If you need to use snow chains, fit the emergency spare wheel to the rear axle
and check the tyre pressure.
PUNCTURE/EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL (2/2)
4
3
1
5
2
Emergency spare wheel 3
To access it:
This is located in the luggage compartment.
– open the boot;
– lift up the boot carpet 1 using the
tab 2;
– unscrew the central fixing located,
depending on the vehicle, under the
jack 4;
– depending on the vehicle, remove
the tool kit 5 and/or the amplifier;
– remove the emergency spare wheel.
5.3
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (1/3)
B
A
Do not attempt to use the
inflation kit if the tyre has
been damaged as a result
of driving with a puncture.
The kit is only approved for
inflating the tyres of the vehicle originally equipped
with the kit.
You should therefore carefully check
the condition of the tyre sidewalls
before any operation.
It must never be used to inflate
the tyres of another vehicle, or any
other inflatable object (rubber ring,
rubber boat, etc.).
Driving with underinflated, flat or
punctured tyres can be dangerous
and may make the tyre impossible
to repair.
This repair is temporary
The kit repairs tyres when
tread A has been damaged by objects smaller
than 4 mm. It cannot repair
all types of puncture, such as cuts
larger than 4 mm, or cuts in tyre
sidewall B.
Ensure also that the wheel rim is in
good condition.
Do not pull out the foreign body
causing the puncture if it is still in
the tyre.
5.4
A tyre which has been punctured
should always be inspected (and repaired, where possible) as soon as
possible by a specialist.
When taking a tyre which has been
repaired using this kit to be replaced,
you must inform the specialist.
When driving, vibration may be felt
due to the presence of the repair
product injected into the tyre.
Avoid spillage on skin when handling the repair liquid bottle. If droplets do leak out, rinse them off with
plenty of water.
Keep the repair kit away from children.
Do not dispose of the empty bottle
in the countryside. Return it to your
approved dealer or to a recycling organisation.
The bottle has a limited service
life which is indicated on its label.
Check the expiry date.
Contact an approved dealer to replace the inflation tube and repair
product bottle.
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (2/3)
With the engine running and the
parking brake applied,
– unroll the hose from the container;
1
8
– connect the compressor hose 3 to
the container’s inlet 8;
2
7
– unscrew the valve cap on the relevant wheel and screw on the container’s inflation adapter 1;
6
5
4
– depending on the vehicle, connect
the container 8 to the compressor
from the container recess 7;
3
In the event of a puncture, use the kit
located in the boot, underneath the
boot carpet
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.
– after a maximum of 15 minutes, stop
inflating and read the pressure (on
pressure gauge 5).
Note: while the bottle is emptying
(approximately 30 seconds), the
pressure gauge 5 will indicate briefly
a pressure of 6 bar, then the pressure drops.
– Adjust the pressure: to increase
it, continue inflation with the kit. To
reduce it, press the button 6.
– disconnect any accessories previously connected to the vehicle’s accessories sockets;
– end piece 2 must be connected to a
vehicle accessories socket;
– press switch 4 to inflate the tyre to
the recommended pressure (please
refer to the information on “Tyre inflation pressure” in Section 4);
Before using the kit, park
the vehicle at a sufficient
distance from traffic, switch
on the hazard warning
lights, apply the parking brake, ask
all passengers to leave the vehicle
and keep them away from traffic.
5.5
TYRE PRESSURE KIT (3/3)
1
Once the tyre is correctly inflated,
remove the kit: slowly unscrew the inflation end piece 1 to prevent any product spatter and store the container in
plastic packaging to prevent product
leaks.
– Affix the driving recommendation
label to the dashboard where it can
easily be seen by the driver;
– Put the kit away.
– At the end of this initial inflation operation, air will still escape from the
tyre. You must drive a short distance
in order to seal the hole.
If a minimum pressure of 1.8 bar is
not reached after 15 minutes, repair
is not possible; do not drive the vehicle but contact an approved dealer.
Nothing should be placed
around the driver’s feet
as such objects may slide
under the pedals during
sudden braking manoeuvres and
obstruct their use.
5.6
– Start immediately and drive at between 12 and 40 mph (20 and
60 km/h) in order to distribute the
product evenly in the tyre and, after
driving for 2 miles (3 km), stop and
check the pressure.
– If the pressure is greater than 1.3 bar
but less than the recommended
pressure (refer to the label affixed to
the edge of the driver’s door), readjust it. Otherwise, please contact an
authorised dealer: the tyre cannot be
repaired.
Precautions when using the
kit
The kit should not be operated for more
than 15 consecutive minutes.
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and may
lead to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
Following repair with the kit,
do not travel further than
120 miles (200 km). In addition, reduce your speed and
under no circumstances exceed
48 mph (80 km/h). The sticker,
which you must affix in a prominent
position on the dashboard, reminds
you of this.
Depending on the country or local
legislation, a tyre repaired with the
inflation kit may need to be replaced.
TOOLS
Hubcap tool 3
1
2
This tool is used to remove the wheel
trims.
Screw guide 4
A
3
6
5
For tightening/loosening wheel bolts on
vehicles fitted with alloy wheels
4
Towing hitch 5
Refer to the information on “Towing” in
Section 5.
Tool kit storage
Jack 1
The presence of the tools depends on
the vehicle.
Fold it correctly before refitting it in its
housing (ensure that the wheelbrace is
correctly positioned 2).
The tool kit A is located in the boot,
under the carpet.
Wheelbrace 6
Locks or unlocks the wheel bolts and
tow eye 6.
Lift the cover, then remove it.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as they may come loose under braking. After use, check that all
the tools are correctly clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: risk of injury.
If wheel bolts are supplied in the tool kit, only use these bolts for the emergency spare wheel: refer to the label affixed
to the emergency spare wheel.
The jack is designed for wheel changing purposes only. Under no circumstances should it be used for carrying out repairs underneath the vehicle or to gain access to the underside of the vehicle.
5.7
HUBCAP
D
1
C
B
A
2
Remove using the hubcap tool 1 (located in the tool kit) by connecting the
hook in the recess provided next to the
valve 2 (to attach the metal clip).
To refit it, align it with valve 2. Push the
retaining hooks in fully, starting with
side A near the valve, followed by B
and C, finishing at D opposite the valve.
Note: if you are using anti-theft bolts,
refer to the information on “Changing a
wheel”.
5.8
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle
as they may come loose
under braking. After use,
check that all the tools are correctly
clipped into the tool kit, then position it correctly in its housing: risk of
injury.
CHANGING A WHEEL (1/2)
Vehicles equipped with a jack
and wheelbrace
If necessary, remove the wheel trim.
2
Use the wheelbrace 2 to slacken off the
wheel bolts. Position it so as to be able
to push from above.
1
Place the jack 3 horizontally; the jack
head must be lined up with the sill closest to the wheel concerned, as shown
by an arrow 1.
Crank up the jack by hand at first to
align the base plate (which should be
inclined further inwards than the jack
head).
Turn the wheelbrace until the wheel lifts
off the ground.
3
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
Keep the vehicle away from
traffic and on a level surface
where it will not slip.
Apply the parking brake and engage
a gear (first or reverse, or P for automatic transmissions).
Ask all the passengers to leave the
vehicle and keep them away from
traffic.
If the vehicle is not equipped with a
jack or wheelbrace, you can obtain
these from your approved dealer.
If the vehicle is parked on
the hard shoulder, you must
warn other road users of
your vehicle’s presence
with a warning triangle or with other
devices as per the legislation applying to the country you are in.
5.9
CHANGING A WHEEL (2/2)
Undo the bolts and take off the wheel.
Fit the emergency spare wheel onto
the hub and rotate it until the mounting
holes in the wheel coincide with those
of the hub.
If bolts are supplied with the emergency
spare wheel, only use these bolts for
the emergency spare wheel. Tighten
the bolts, checking that the wheel is
correctly positioned on its hub and unscrew the jack.
With the wheel on the ground, tighten
the bolts fully and have the tightness of
the bolts checked and the emergency
spare wheel pressure checked as soon
as possible.
Anti-theft bolt
If you use anti-theft bolts, fit these
nearest the valve (wheel embellisher may not be able to fit).
If you have a puncture, replace the wheel as soon as
possible.
A tyre which has been punctured should always be inspected
(and repaired, where possible) by a
specialist.
5.10
TYRES (1/3)
The tyres are the only contact between
the vehicle and the road, so it is essential to keep them in good condition.
You must make sure that your tyres
con- form to local road traffic regulations.
2
1
For your safety, please respect the speed limit.
When they need to be replaced, only tyres of the
same make, size, type and profile
should be used on a single axle.
They must: either have a load capacity and a speed capacity at
least equal to the original tyres,
or correspond to those recommended by your authorised
dealer.
Failure to heed these instructions
could endanger your safety and
affect your vehicle’s roadworthiness.
Risk of loss of control of the vehicle.
When the tread has worn down to the
wear warning strips, these strips will
become visible 2: it is then necessary
to replace your tyres because the tread
rubber is now only 1.6 mm deep at
most, resulting in poor road holding
on wet roads.
An overloaded vehicle, long journeys
by motorway, particularly in very hot
weather, or continual driving on poorly
surfaced minor roads will lead to more
rapid tyre wear and affect safety.
Maintaining the tyres
The tyres must be in good condition
and the tread form must have sufficient
depth; tyres approved by our Technical
Department have tread wear indicators 1 which are indicators moulded
into the tread at several points.
Incidents which occur when
driving, such as striking the
kerb, may damage the tyres
and wheel rims, and could
also lead to misalignment of the
front or rear axle geometry. In this
case, have the condition of these
checked by an approved dealer.
5.11
TYRES (2/3)
Tyre pressures
Adhere to the tyre pressures (including
the emergency spare wheel). The tyre
pressures should be checked at least
once a month and additionally before
any long journey (refer to the label affixed to the edge of the driver’s door).
The pressures should be checked cold:
ignore higher pressures which may be
reached in hot weather or following a
high speed journey.
Vehicle fitted with a tyre pressure
monitoring system
If the tyre pressures cannot be checked
when the tyres are cold, increase the
pressures from 0.2 to 0.3 bar (or 3 PSI).
sure, etc.), the warning light
lights up on the instrument panel;
please refer to “Tyre pressure loss
warning” or “Tyre pressure monitoring
system” in Section 2.
Never deflate a hot tyre.
Special note
Depending on the vehicle, there may
be an adapter which needs to be positioned on the valve before air is added.
Incorrect tyre pressures
lead to abnormal tyre wear
and unusually hot running.
These are factors which
may seriously affect safety and lead
to:
Emergency spare wheel
Refer to the information on “Puncture”
and “Changing a wheel” in Section 5.
This practice is not recommended.
– risk of bursting or tread separation.
Please be aware that a
poorly tightened or missing valve cap can make the
tyres less airtight and lead
to pressure loss.
Always use valve caps identical to
those fitted originally and tighten
them fully.
5.12
Changing wheels around
– poor road holding,
The pressure depends on the load
and the speed of use. Adjust the
pressure according to the conditions of use (refer to the label affixed
to the edge of the driver’s door).
If under-inflated (puncture, low pres-
TYRES (3/3)
Fitting new tyres
For safety reasons, this operation must be carried out
by a specialist.
Fitting different tyres may
change your vehicle as follows:
– it may mean that your vehicle no
longer conforms to current regulations;
– it may change the way it handles
when cornering;
– it may cause the steering to be
heavy;
– It may affect the use of snow
chains.
Use in winter
Studded tyres
Chains
This type of equipment may only be
used for a limited period and as laid
down by local legislation. It is necessary to observe the speed specified by
current legislation.
For safety reasons, fitting snow
chains to the rear axle is strictly forbidden.
Chains cannot be fitted to tyres which
are larger than those originally fitted to
the vehicle.
These tyres must, at a minimum, be
fitted to the two front wheels.
Snow or Winter tyres
We would recommend that these be
fitted to all four wheels to ensure that
your vehicle retains maximum adhesion.
Warning: These tyres sometimes have
a specific direction of rotation and a
maximum speed index which may be
lower than the maximum speed of your
vehicle.
In all cases, we would recommend
that you contact an authorised
dealer who will be able to advise you
on the choice of equipment which is
most suitable for your vehicle.
Changing a wheel
As the tyre pressure monitor may take several minutes to correctly determine
the positions of the wheels and the
pressure values after driving, check
the tyre pressures following any operation.
Snow chains may only be
fitted to tyres of the same
size as those originally
fitted to your vehicle.
17” wheels and larger
cannot be fitted with
chains.
If you wish to use special
equipment, please consult an authorised dealer.
5.13
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (1/2)
3
4
A
1
B
2
LED dipped beam
headlights 1
Halogen dipped beam
headlight 1
Halogen main beam
headlight 2
Please see an authorised dealer.
To change the bulb:
– open the bonnet;
– remove cover B;
– Turn the bulb holder a quarter
turn 4;
– remove the bulb.
To change the bulb:
– open the bonnet;
– remove cover A;
– pull the bulb holder 3;
– remove the bulb.
Bulb type: H7.
It is essential to use anti-U.V. 55W
bulbs so as not to damage the plastic
on the headlights.
LED main beam headlights 2
Please see an authorised dealer.
Please note when working close to the engine that
it may be hot. In addition,
the engine cooling fan may
start at any moment.
Risk of injury.
5.14
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Bulb type: H7.
Do not touch the bulb glass. Hold it
by its base.
When the bulb has been changed,
make sure you refit the cover correctly.
FRONT HEADLIGHTS: replacing the bulbs (2/2)
Front fog lights 7
Cleaning the headlights
– Access the bulb holder via the underneath of the vehicle;
– unclip the flap;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn;
– remove the bulb.
Use a soft cloth. If this does not clean
it properly, moisten the cloth with soapy
water then rinse off.
Type of bulb: H16.
Cleaning products containing alcohol must not be used.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
5
6
7
Daytime running lights and
side lights 5
8
Direction indicator light 6
Please see an authorised dealer.
– Access the bulb holder via the underneath of the vehicle;
– unclip the access flap 8;
– turn the bulb holder a quarter turn;
– remove the bulb.
If you wish to fit fog lights to your vehicle, please see an authorised dealer.
Additional lights
Type of bulb: PY21W.
Once the bulb has been replaced,
check that it is properly secured.
However, we would advise you to have
them replaced by an approved dealer if
it proves difficult.
Finally, carefully dry off with a soft dry
cloth.
To comply with local legislation, or
as a precaution, you can obtain an
emergency kit containing a set of
spare bulbs and fuses from an approved dealer.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
Any operation on (or modification to) the electrical
system must be performed
by an approved dealer
since an incorrect connection might
damage the electrical equipment
(harness, components and in particular the alternator). In addition, your
Dealer has all the parts required for
fitting these units.
5.15
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (1/3)
6
7
5
1
2
3
Side light 3
Consult an approved dealer.
4
Access to the bulb holders 6
et 7
Open the boot, remove the cover 4 to
access the screw 5 and undo it.
Turn bulb holder 6 a quarter of a turn
and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: P21W.
Remove the rear lights unit.
Refit the bulb holder and push the unit
in fully until it locks in place.
Direction indicators 2
Check that the light is properly locked
in position.
Turn bulb holder 7 a quarter of a turn
and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: PY21W.
5.16
Brake lights 1
Tighten the screw 5 and reposition the
cover 4.
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (2/3)
10
9
8
11
Reversing lights
From the boot, unclip the cover on the
interior trim of the boot lid 8 using a
screwdriver or similar tool.
Turn bulb holder 9 a quarter of a turn
and take out the bulb.
Bulb type: W16W.
High level brake light 10
Consult an approved dealer.
Refitting
Rear fog lights 11
To refit, proceed in the reverse order,
taking care not to damage the wiring.
The front bumper needs to be removed;
consult an authorised dealer.
Bulb type: P21W.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.17
REAR AND SIDE LIGHTS: changing bulbs (3/3)
12
13
14
Number plate lights 12
– Unclip the light 12 (using a tool such
as a flat-blade screwdriver).
– remove the light cover to gain access
to the bulb.
Side repeaters 13 et welcome
lighting 14
The wing mirror needs to be removed;
consult an authorised dealer.
Bulb type: W5W.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.18
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (1/2)
Ambient lighting
Please consult an authorised dealer.
1
2
Map reading lights 1
Courtesy light 2
Please consult an authorised dealer.
Please consult an authorised dealer.
5.19
INTERIOR LIGHTING: changing bulbs (2/2)
5
6
7
4
3
Glove box light 3
Luggage compartment light 4
Unclip light 3 by pressing the tabs on
each side (using a flat-blade screwdriver or similar).
Unclip light 4 by pressing the tabs on
each side (using a flat-blade screwdriver or similar).
Disconnect the light.
Disconnect the light.
Press tab 5 to release lens 7 and
access bulb 6.
Press tab 5 to release lens 7 and
access bulb 6.
Bulb type: W5W.
Bulb type: W5W.
The bulbs are under pressure and can break when
replaced.
Risk of injury.
5.20
FUSES (1/2)
Use the fuse allocation label on the
back of flap A to identify the fuses.
Certain fuses should only be replaced
by a qualified professional. These fuses
are not listed on the label.
A
Only change the fuses represented on
the label.
1
Fuse box
Tweezers 1
If any electrical component does not
work, check the condition of the fuses.
Remove the fuse using tweezers 1, located at the back of flap A.
Unclip the access flap A.
In accordance with local legislation
or as a precautionary measure:
Check the fuse in question
and replace it, if necessary, by a fuse of the same
rating.
To remove the fuse from the tweezers,
slide the fuse to the side.
It is not advisable to use the free fuse
locations.
If a fuse is fitted where the rating is
too high, it may cause the electrical
circuit to overheat (risk of fire) in the
event of an item of equipment using
an excessive amount of current.
obtain an emergency kit containing
a set of spare bulbs and fuses from
an approved Dealer.
5.21
FUSES (2/2)
Allocation of fuses
(the presence of certain fuses depends on the vehicle equipment level)
Symbol
Allocation
Symbol
Allocation
H
Windscreen washer
ë
Not used
Not used
Æ
Front cigarette lighter, front and rear second row
accessories socket
Diagnostic socket, audio alarm
Not used
Heated door mirrors
×
Brake lights, passenger compartment central unit
Parking brake
Additional servo
î
Radio, multifunction screen, multimedia accessories sockets, parking brake control
Passenger compartment centre unit, rear wiper,
rear fog light
5.22
Ý
Ì
O
D
Towbar socket
Horn
Instrument panel, dashboard control lighting
Locking opening elements, boot opening and
closing control
Direction indicator lights, hazard warning lights
Rear USB sockets on console
BATTERY: troubleshooting (1/2)
To avoid all risk of sparks:
Connecting a battery charger
– Ensure that any consumers (courtesy lights, etc.) are switched off
before disconnecting or reconnecting the battery;
The battery charger must be compatible with a battery with nominal
voltage of 12 volts.
– when charging, stop the charger
before connecting or disconnecting
the battery;
Do not disconnect the battery when the
engine is running. Follow the instructions given by the manufacturer of
the battery charger you are using.
– to avoid creating a short circuit between the terminals, do not place
metal objects on the battery;
– always wait at least one minute after
the engine has been switched off
before disconnecting a battery;
Handle the battery with care
as it contains sulphuric acid,
which must not come into
contact with eyes or skin. If
it does, wash the affected area with
plenty of cold water. If necessary,
consult a doctor.
– make sure that you reconnect the
battery terminals after refitting.
Special procedures may be
required to charge some
batteries. Contact your authorised dealer.
Before performing any
action in the engine compartment, the ignition must
be switched off (please see
the information on “Starting, stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Avoid all risk of sparks which may
cause an immediate explosion, and
charge the battery in a well-ventilated area. Risk of serious injury.
Ensure that naked flames, red hot
objects and sparks do not come into
contact with the battery as there is a
risk of explosion. There is a risk of
explosion.
The engine may be hot when carrying out operations in close proximity. In addition, the engine cooling
fan can come on at any moment.
Risk of injury.
5.23
BATTERY: troubleshooting (2/2)
Starting the vehicle using the
battery from another vehicle
If you have to use the battery from another vehicle to start, obtain suitable
jump leads (with a large cross section)
from an approved dealer or, if you already have jump leads, ensure that
they are in perfect condition.
1
2
3
B
The two batteries must have an identical nominal voltage of 12 volts. The
battery supplying the current should
have a capacity (amp-hours, Ah) which
is at least the same as that of the discharged battery.
Ensure that there is no risk of contact
between the two vehicles (risk of short
circuiting when the positive terminals
are connected) and that the discharged
battery is properly connected. Switch
off your vehicle ignition.
Start the engine of the vehicle supplying the current and run it at a moderate
speed.
2
A
5
Lift the red cover on box 1 located
behind the battery.
Connect the positive cable A to support 3 (+) located under the box
cover 1, then to terminal 5 (+) of the
battery supplying the current.
Connect the negative cable B to the
terminal 4 (–) of the battery supplying
the current then to the metal cable 2
(–) of the discharged battery.
4
Start the engine, and as soon as it starts
running, disconnect cables A and B in
reverse order (2 - 4 - 5 - 3).
Check that there is no contact between leads A and B
and that the positive lead A
is not touching any metal
parts on the vehicle supplying the
current.
Risk of injury and/or damage to the
vehicle.
5.24
RENAULT CARD: battery
1
A
2
Replacing the battery
When the message “Keycard battery
low” appears on the instrument panel,
replace the battery in the RENAULT
card:
– slide the rear casing 1 downwards
while pressing on zone A;
– remove the battery cover 2;
– remove the battery by pressing on
one side and lifting the other;
– replace it according to the direction and template shown inside the
cover.
When refitting, proceed in the reverse
order, then press one of the buttons on
the card four times, close to the vehicle:
the message will disappear.
Note: it is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit or contacts on the
RENAULT card when replacing the battery.
The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years. Check
that there is no dye on the battery:
risk of an incorrect electrical contact.
Operating faults
If the battery is too weak to ensure correct operation, you can still start and
lock/unlock the vehicle (please refer to
the information on “Locking/unlocking
the opening elements” in Section 1).
Do not throw away your
used batteries; give them to
an organisation responsible
for collecting and recycling
batteries.
5.25
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: batteries
1
1
Replacing the battery
Open the case at slot 1 using a flatblade screwdriver or similar, and replace the battery 2, observing the polarity shown on the back of the cover.
2
Note: It is not advisable to touch the
electronic circuit in the key cover when
replacing the battery.
The batteries are available from approved Dealers, and their service
life approximately two years.
Check that there is no dye on the
battery: risk of an incorrect electrical contact.
5.26
When refitting, ensure that the cover
is correctly clipped on and the screw
tightened.
Do not throw away your
used batteries; give them to
an organisation responsible
for collecting and recycling
batteries.
ACCESSORIES
Electrical and electronic accessories
Before installing this type of accessory (particularly for transmitters/receivers: frequency bandwidth, power level, position of the aerial, etc.), make sure it is compatible with your vehicle. You can get advice from an authorised dealer.
Connect accessories with a maximum power of 120 Watts only. Fire hazard. When several accessory sockets are
used at the same time, the total power of the connected accessories must not exceed 180 watts.
No work may be carried out on the vehicle’s electrical or radio circuits, except by authorised dealers: an incorrectly connected
system may result in damage being caused to the electrical equipment and/or the components connected to it.
If the vehicle is fitted with any aftermarket electrical equipment, make sure that the installation is correctly protected by a fuse.
Establish the rating and position of this fuse.
Using the diagnostic socket
The use of electronic accessories on the diagnostic socket may cause serious disturbance to the vehicle’s electronic systems.
For your safety we recommend that you use only electronic accessories approved by the manufacturer, consult an Approved
Dealer. Serious accident risk.
Use of transmitting/receiving devices (telephones, CB equipment etc.).
Telephones and CB equipment with integrated aerials may cause interference to the electronic systems originally fitted to the
vehicle: it is advisable only to use equipment with an external aerial. Furthermore, we remind you of the need to conform
to the legislation in force concerning the use of such equipment.
Fitting aftermarket accessories
If you wish to install accessories on the vehicle: please contact an authorised dealer. Also, to ensure the correct operation of
your vehicle, and to avoid any risk to your safety, we recommend that you use only accessories specifically designed for your
vehicle, which are the only accessories for which the manufacturer will provide a warranty.
If you are using an anti-theft device, only attach it to the brake pedal.
Obstructions to the driver
On the driver’s side, only use mats suitable for the vehicle, attached with the pre-fitted components, and check the fitting regularly. Do not lay one mat on top of another. There is a risk of wedging the pedals.
5.27
WIPER BLADES: REPLACEMENT (1/2)
1
A
2
3
Replacing windscreen wiper
blades 1
With the ignition on and engine
switched off, lower the windscreen
wiper stalk completely: they stop
slightly away from the bonnet.
Lift wiper arm 3, pull tab 2 (movement A) and push the blade upwards.
To refit
Slide the blade along the arm until it
clips on. Make sure that the blade is
correctly locked in position. Return the
windscreen wiper stalk to the park position.
5.28
– In frosty weather, make
sure that the wiper blades
are not stuck by ice (to
avoid the risk of the motor
overheating).
Check the condition of the wiper
blades. You are responsible for their
service life:
– clean the blades, windscreen and
rear screen regularly with soapy
water;
– do not use them when the windscreen or rear screen are dry;
– free them from the windscreen or
rear screen when they have not
been used for a long time.
– Check the condition of the wiper
blades.
Replace the wiper blades as soon
as they begin to lose efficiency
(approximately once a year).
Whilst changing the blade, take care
not to drop the arm onto the window
after it has been removed as this
may break the window.
WIPER BLADES: REPLACEMENT (2/2)
To refit
To refit the wiper blade, proceed in reverse order to removal. Make sure that
the blade is correctly locked in position.
B
4
C
5
6
Rear screen wiper blade 4
Stalk in stop position (deactivated):
– Lift wiper arm 6;
– pivot blade 4 until some resistance is
met (movement C);
– depending on the vehicle, press
tab 5, then remove the blade by pulling it (movement B).
Before changing the rear
wiper blade, make sure the
stalk is in the stop position
(deactivated).
Risk of injury.
5.29
TOWING: breakdown recovery (1/2)
Before towing, put the gearbox in neutral, unlock the steering column and release the parking brake.
For vehicles fitted with an automatic
gearbox, if it is not possible to put the
gear lever into position N, please consult an authorised dealer.
Steering column unlocking
Insert the key into the ignition or, depending on the vehicle, having the
RENAULT card on you, press the
engine start button for 2 seconds.
Reposition the lever to neutral (position N for vehicles fitted with an automatic gearbox).
The column is unlocked, the accessory functions are supplied: the vehicle lights can be used (indicators, brake
lights etc.). At night the vehicle must
have its lights on.
Depending on the vehicle, once you
have finished towing, press the engine
start button twice (risk of running down
the battery).
The speed specified by current legislation for towing must always be observed. If your vehicle is the towing
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum
towing weight for your vehicle (refer
to the information on “Weights” in
Section 6).
1
Towing a vehicle with an
automatic gearbox
Transport the vehicle on a trailer or tow
it with the front wheels off the ground.
In exceptional circumstances, you
may tow it with all four wheels on the
ground, only in a forward gear, with the
gear in neutral position N over a maximum distance of 50 miles and not exceeding a speed of 15 mph (25 km/h).
If the lever is stuck in P, even though
you are depressing the brake pedal, the
lever can be released manually.
To do this, unclip the base of the lever,
then insert a tool (with a hard rod to it)
into the slot 1 and press the button 2
at the same time in order to unlock the
lever.
Contact an authorised dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not remove the key from
the ignition when the vehicle is being towed.
5.30
2
TOWING: breakdown recovery (2/2)
Use the towing eye 5 only (refer to
the information on the “tool kit” in
Section 5).
D
B
A
C
– Use a rigid towing bar.
If a rope or cable is used
(where the law allows this),
the vehicle being towed
must be able to brake.
5
3
3
5
4
4
Only use the front 3 and rear 6 towing
points
(never use the drive shafts or any other
part of the vehicle)
These towing points may only be used
for towing: never use them for lifting the
vehicle directly or indirectly.
5
6
– A vehicle must not be towed if it is
not fit to be driven.
7
Access to towing points
Front towing point 3
Press zone A and keep depressed
while pulling zone B to open flap 4.
Rear towing point 6
Press zone C and keep depressed
while pulling zone D to open flap 7.
– Avoid accelerating or braking
suddenly when towing, as this
may result in damage being
caused to the vehicle.
– When towing a vehicle, it is advisable not to exceed 30 mph
(50 km/h).
– Do not push the vehicle if the
steering column is locked.
Screw in the tow eye 5 by hand as far
as possible.
When the engine is
stopped, steering and braking assistance are not operational.
Do not leave the tools unsecured inside the vehicle as
they may come loose under
braking.
5.31
OPERATING FAULTS (1/7)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved Dealer as soon as possible.
Using the RENAULT card
POSSIBLE CAUSES
WHAT TO DO
The RENAULT card does not lock or
unlock the doors.
Card battery is flat.
Replace the battery. You can still lock/
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the information on “Locking, unlocking the opening elements” in Section 1 and “Starting,
stopping the engine” in Section 2).
Use of appliances operating on the
same frequency as the card (mobile
phone, etc.).
Stop using the equipment or use the integrated key (refer to the information on
“Locking, unlocking the opening elements”
in Section 1).
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic radiation zone.
Use the key integrated in the card (refer to
the information on “Locking, unlocking the
opening elements” in Section 1).
Vehicle battery flat.
The vehicle is started.
5.32
With the engine running, the card’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the ignition.
OPERATING FAULTS (2/7)
The following advice will enable you to carry out quick, temporary repairs. For safety reasons you should always contact
an approved dealer as soon as possible.
Using the remote control
POSSIBLE CAUSES
The remote control does not lock or The remote control battery is flat.
unlock the doors.
ACTION REQUIRED
Use the emergency key.
Use of appliances operating on the same Stop using the devices or use the key.
frequency as the remote control (mobile
phone, etc.).
Vehicle located in a high electromagnetic Replace the battery. You can still lock/
radiation zone.
unlock and start your vehicle (refer to the
Discharged battery.
information on “Locking/unlocking the
doors” in Section 1 and “Starting/Stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
The vehicle is started.
With the engine running, the key’s locking/
unlocking device is blocked. Turn off the
ignition.
5.33
OPERATING FAULTS (3/7)
The starter is activated
POSSIBLE CAUSES
WHAT TO DO
The instrument panel indicator lights are
weak or fail to light up and the starter
does not turn.
Battery terminals not tight,
battery terminals disconnected or oxidised.
Retighten or reconnect the terminals, or clean them if
they are oxidised.
Discharged battery or not
operational.
Connect another battery to the faulty battery. Refer to
information on “Battery: troubleshooting” in Section 5
or replace the battery if necessary.
Do not push the vehicle if the steering column is
locked.
Faulty circuit.
Consult an approved dealer.
Starting conditions are not
fulfilled.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
The RENAULT card does
not work.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
Card not detected.
Please refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2.
Electronic fault.
Press the starter button quickly five times.
Steering wheel locked.
Move the steering wheel while pressing the engine
start button or, depending on the vehicle, while turning
the key (refer to the information on “Starting, stopping
the engine” in Section 2).
Faulty circuit.
Consult an approved dealer.
The engine will not start.
The engine cannot be switched off.
The steering column remains locked.
5.34
OPERATING FAULTS (4/7)
On the road
POSSIBLE CAUSES
WHAT TO DO
Vibrations.
Tyres not inflated to correct pressures, incorrectly balanced or damaged.
Check the tyre pressures: if this is not the
problem, have them checked by an approved Dealer.
White smoke from the exhaust.
In the diesel version, this is necessarily a fault. Smoke may be caused by
particle filter regeneration.
Refer to the information on “Special features of diesel versions” in Section 2.
Smoke under the bonnet.
Short-circuit or cooling system leak.
Stop, switch off the ignition, stand away
from the vehicle and contact an approved
dealer.
while cornering or braking
The level is too low.
Top up the engine oil level (refer to the information on “Engine oil level: topping up,
filling” in Section 4).
is slow to go out or remains lit
under acceleration
Loss of oil pressure.
Stop the vehicle and contact an approved
Dealer.
The oil pressure warning light comes
on:
5.35
OPERATING FAULTS (5/7)
On the road
POSSIBLE CAUSES
WHAT TO DO
Steering becomes heavy.
Assistance overheating.
Consult an approved dealer.
The engine is overheating. The coolant temperature indicator is in the
warning zone and warning light
® comes on.
Engine cooling fan not working.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and
contact an approved dealer.
Coolant leaks.
Check the coolant reservoir: it should contain fluid. If there is no coolant, consult an
approved dealer as soon as possible.
Mechanical fault: damaged cylinder
head gasket.
Stop the engine.
Contact an approved dealer.
Coolant boiling in the coolant reservoir.
Radiator: If there is a significant lack of coolant, remember that it must never be topped up using cold coolant while
the engine is very warm. After any procedure on the vehicle which has involved even partial draining of the cooling
system, it must be refilled with a new mixture prepared in the correct proportions. Reminder: only products approved
by our Technical Department may be used for this purpose.
5.36
OPERATING FAULTS (6/7)
Electrical equipment
POSSIBLE CAUSES
WHAT TO DO
The wipers do not work.
Wiper blades stuck.
Free the blades before using the wipers.
Faulty electrical circuit.
Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged.
Replace the fuse, refer to the information
on “Fuses”.
The wiper does not stop.
Faulty electrical controls.
Consult an approved dealer.
Direction indicators flashing more
quickly.
Blown bulb.
See information on “Headlights: changing
bulbs” or “Rear and side lights: changing
bulbs”.
The direction indicators do not work.
Faulty electrical circuit or control.
Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged.
Replace the fuse, refer to the information
on “Fuses”.
Faulty electrical circuit or control.
Consult an approved dealer.
Fuse damaged.
Replace the fuse, refer to the information
on “Fuses”.
The lights do not come on or go off.
5.37
OPERATING FAULTS (7/7)
Electrical equipment
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Traces of condensation in the lights.
Traces of condensation may be a natural phenomenon caused by variations in temperature.
WHAT TO DO
In this case, the traces will disappear
slowly once the lights are switched
on.
The front seat belt reminder light
comes on when the seat belts are
fastened.
5.38
An object is stuck between the floor
and the seat and is disrupting the operation of the sensor.
Remove all objects from underneath the
front seats.
Section 6: Technical specifications
Vehicle identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine identification plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement parts and repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anticorrosion check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.15
6.1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A
A
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The information shown on the vehicle identification plate should be
quoted on all correspondence or
orders.
The presence and location of the information depends on the vehicle.
B
6.2
Vehicle identification plate A
1 Manufacturer name.
2 EC design number or approval
number.
3 Identification number.
Depending on the vehicle, this
information is also given on
marking B.
4 MMAC (Maximum permissible
all-up weight).
5 MTR (Gross train weight: vehicle
fully loaded, with trailer).
6 MMTA (Maximum Permissible
Weight) front axle.
7 MMTA rear axle.
8 Reserved for related or additional
entries.
9 Diesel exhaust emissions.
10 Paint reference (colour code).
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (1/2)
A
1
2
3
A
A
Please quote the information on the
engine plate or label A in all correspondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.
A
6.3
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION PLATES (2/2)
A
1
C
2
3
Please quote the information on the
engine plate or label A in all correspondence or orders.
(Location varies depending on engine)
1 Engine type.
2 Engine suffix.
3 Engine number.
6.4
1
3
AC
2
A
DIMENSIONS (in metres)
0,921
2,670
0,768
1,574 to 1,596
4,359
1,446*
1,565 to 1,599
2,058
* Unladen
6.5
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Versions
Engine type
(see engine plate)
Cubic capacity (cc)
1.2 TCe
1.6 16V
1.6 TCe
1.5 dCi
1.6 dCi
H5F Turbo
H4M
M5M Turbo
K9K
R9M
1197
1598
1618
1 461
1598
Diesel
Type of fuel
Octane rating
It is essential that you use unleaded petrol of the octane
rating stated on the label inside the fuel filler flap.
Spark plugs
Only use the spark plugs specified for your vehicle’s engine.
The type should be marked on a label affixed inside the
engine compartment. If it is not then contact an approved
Dealer.
Fitting spark plugs which are not to specification may
damage the engine.
6.6
The label located in the fuel filler
flap indicates authorised fuels.
–
WEIGHTS (in kg)
The weights indicated are for a basic vehicle without options: they may vary depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
Consult an approved Dealer.
Maximum Permissible All-Up Weight (MMAC)
Gross Train Weight (MTR)
Maximum permissible all-up weight (MMTA)
Braked Trailer Weight*
Weights are indicated on the vehicle identification plate (refer
to the information on “Vehicle identification plates” in Section 6)
found by calculating: MTR - MMAC
Unbraked Trailer Weight*
640
Permissible nose weight*
75
Permissible load on the roof with the carrying device
80 kg (including the carrying device)
* Towing weight (towing a caravan, boat, etc.)
Towing is prohibited when the MTR - MMAC calculation is equal to zero, or when the MTR is equal to zero (or is not listed) on the
identification plate.
– It is important to comply with the towing weights, governed by local legislation in each country and, in particular, laid down in
the Road Traffic Regulations. Contact an approved Dealer about any towing equipment.
– When towing, under no circumstances may the total train weight (vehicle + trailer) be exceeded. However the following is
permitted:
– rear axle MMTA exceeded by no more than 15%,
– maximum MMAC exceeded by no more than 10% or 100 kg (whichever is reached first).
In either case, the maximum speed of the towing assembly must not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) and the tyre pressure must be
increased by 0.2 bar (3 PSI).
– The engine output and climbing capability are reduced with altitude. We recommend that the maximum load be reduced by 10%
at an altitude of 1,000 metres and by an additional 10% for each 1,000 metres thereafter.
6.7
REPLACEMENT PARTS AND REPAIRS
Original parts are based on strict specifications and are subject to highly-specialised tests. Therefore, they are of at least the same
level of quality as the parts fitted originally.
If you always fit genuine replacement parts to your vehicle, you will ensure that it performs well. Furthermore, repairs carried out
within the manufacturer’s Network using original parts are guaranteed according to the conditions set out on the reverse of the
repair order.
6.8
SERVICE SHEETS (1/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Stamp
□
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.9
SERVICE SHEETS (2/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.10
□
Stamp
SERVICE SHEETS (3/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Stamp
□
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.11
SERVICE SHEETS (4/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.12
□
Stamp
SERVICE SHEETS (5/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Stamp
□
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.13
SERVICE SHEETS (6/6)
VIN: ..................................................................................
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
□
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Invoice number:
Comments/miscellaneous
Stamp
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Stamp
□
Not OK* □
*See specific page
Date:
Miles (Km):
Type of operation:
Service
□
.......................................
Anti-corrosion check:
OK □
Not OK* □
*See specific page
6.14
□
Stamp
ANTICORROSION CHECK (1/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.15
ANTICORROSION CHECK (2/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Date of repair:
6.16
Stamp
ANTICORROSION CHECK (3/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.17
ANTICORROSION CHECK (4/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Date of repair:
6.18
Stamp
ANTICORROSION CHECK (5/5)
If the continuation of the warranty is subject to repair, it is indicated below.
VIN: ..........................................................
Corrosion repair operation to be carried
out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
Repair to be carried out:
Stamp
Date of repair:
6.19
6.20
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (1/5)
A
ABS .......................................................................2.30 → 2.39
accessories........................................................................ 5.27
accessories socket ................................................... 3.33, 3.43
adaptive cruise control...........................................2.59 → 2.65
additional methods of restraint .....................1.27 → 1.30, 1.33
side protection ............................................................. 1.32
to the rear seat belts ........................................1.27 → 1.31
adjusting your driving position ...............................1.23 → 1.26
advice on antipollution ....................................................... 2.25
air bag....................................................................1.27 → 1.33
activating the front passenger air bags ........................ 1.50
deactivating the front passenger air bags .................... 1.48
air conditioning ........................................................3.6 → 3.19
air vents ...................................................................... 3.4 – 3.5
anti-corrosion check ..............................................6.15 → 6.19
anti-corrosion protection .................................................... 4.15
anti-lock braking system: ABS ...............................2.30 → 2.39
antipollution
advice .......................................................................... 2.25
armrest:
front .............................................................................. 3.31
ashtray ............................................................................... 3.33
assisted parking............................... 2.66 → 2.70, 2.73 → 2.76
automatic gearbox (use) ........................................2.77 → 2.79
automatic gearbox selector lever...........................2.77 → 2.79
B
battery..................................................................... 4.11 – 4.12
troubleshooting ................................................. 5.23 – 5.24
battery (remote control) ..................................................... 5.26
blind spot warning signal .......................................2.43 → 2.46
blind spot: warning signal ......................................2.43 → 2.46
bonnet......................................................................... 4.2 – 4.3
brake fluid ............................................................................ 4.9
bulbs
changing .................................................5.14 → 5.20, 5.20
C
catalytic converter................................................... 2.14 – 2.15
central door locking ...............1.2 – 1.3, 1.5, 1.12 → 1.15, 1.19
changing a bulb ............................................5.14 → 5.20, 5.20
changing a wheel...................................................... 5.9 – 5.10
changing gear ...............................................2.16, 2.77 → 2.79
child restraint/seat .........1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 → 1.44, 1.46 – 1.47
child safety.................1.6, 1.9, 1.18, 1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 → 1.44,
1.46 – 1.47, 3.21
child seats......................1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 → 1.44, 1.46 – 1.47
children .......................................................... 1.34 – 1.35, 1.35
children (safety) .......................................... 1.6, 1.9, 1.18, 3.21
cigar lighter ........................................................................ 3.33
cleaning:
inside the vehicle .............................................. 4.17 – 4.18
clock .................................................................................. 1.82
closing the doors ...................................................1.13 → 1.18
control instruments ................................................. 1.68 – 1.69
controls ..................................................................1.52 → 1.55
coolant ................................................................................. 4.8
courtesy light ...................................... 3.26 – 3.27, 5.19 – 5.20
courtesy mirrors ................................................................. 3.28
cruise control ................................... 2.49 → 2.51, 2.55 → 2.58
cruise control-speed limiter.............. 2.49 → 2.51, 2.55 → 2.58
customised vehicle settings ................................... 1.78 – 1.79
customising the vehicle settings ............................ 1.78 – 1.79
D
dashboard..............................................................1.52 → 1.55
deadlocking the doors ................................................ 1.5, 1.12
demisting
rear screen ...........................................................3.6 → 3.8
windscreen ...........................................................3.6 → 3.8
7.1
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (2/5)
dimensions .......................................................................... 6.5
display .................................... 1.56 → 1.67, 1.64 → 1.67, 3.42
doors......................................................................1.16 → 1.19
doors/tailgate .............................................................. 1.4, 1.12
driver’s position .....................................................1.52 → 1.61
driving ....... 2.2 → 2.7, 2.14 – 2.15, 2.17 → 2.24, 2.27 → 2.39,
2.49 → 2.51, 2.55 → 2.70, 2.77 → 2.79
driving position
settings ............................................................1.23 → 1.26
driving recommendations ......................................2.20 → 2.24
E
ECO driving ...........................................................2.20 → 2.24
ECO mode ......................................................................... 2.22
electric beam height adjustment ............................. 1.85 – 1.86
electric windows ..................................................... 3.21 – 3.22
electronic parking brake ........................................2.17 → 2.19
electronic stability control: ESC .............................2.30 → 2.39
emergency active braking.................................................. 2.34
emergency brake assist.........................................2.30 → 2.39
emergency braking ................................................2.30 → 2.39
emergency key ........................................................... 1.6 – 1.7
emergency spare wheel ............................................. 5.2 – 5.3
engine
technical specifications .................................................. 6.6
engine oil ...................................................4.4 → 4.7, 4.6 – 4.7
engine oil level ...........................................4.5 → 4.7, 4.6 – 4.7
engine specifications ........................................................... 6.6
engine standby ......................................................2.10 → 2.13
engine start/stop button .............................................2.5 → 2.7
environment ....................................................................... 2.26
ESC: electronic stability control .............................2.30 → 2.39
external temperature ......................................................... 1.82
F
faults
operating faults ................................................5.32 → 5.38
filter
air filter ......................................................................... 4.10
diesel filter .................................................................... 4.10
oil filter ......................................................................... 4.10
passenger compartment filter ...................................... 4.10
fittings ....................................................................3.29 → 3.32
freewheel ........................................................................... 2.22
front passenger air bag deactivation ................................. 1.48
front seat adjustment .............................................. 1.21 – 1.22
front seats
adjustment .......................................................1.21 → 1.23
with manual controls .................................................... 1.21
fuel
advice on fuel economy ...................................2.20 → 2.24
capacity ...................................................................... 1.100
consumption ....................................................2.20 → 2.24
filling .............................................................1.100 → 1.102
grade ............................................................1.100 → 1.102
fuel consumption ...................................................2.20 → 2.24
fuel economy .........................................................2.20 → 2.24
fuel level ................................................................... 1.62, 1.64
fuel repriming ................................................................... 1.101
fuel tank
capacity ........................................................1.100 → 1.102
fuel tank capacity ...............................................1.100 → 1.102
fuses ....................................................................... 5.21 – 5.22
G
gear lever........................................................................... 2.16
grab handle........................................................................ 3.31
H
handbrake............................................................... 2.16 – 2.17
7.2
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (3/5)
hands-free telephone integrated control ................. 3.42 – 3.43
hazard warning lights signal .............................................. 1.51
headlight beam adjustment .................................... 1.85 – 1.86
headlight flashers .............................................................. 1.51
headlight washer ...................................................1.94 → 1.97
headrest............................................................................. 3.34
heated steering wheel ....................................................... 1.80
heating and air conditioning system .................3.6 → 3.8, 3.19
heating system ........................................................3.6 → 3.19
Hill Start Assist.......................................................2.30 → 2.39
horn ................................................................................... 1.51
horn:
flash ............................................................................. 1.51
sounding the horn ........................................................ 1.51
hubcap tool ................................................................. 5.7 – 5.8
I
ignition switch ...................................................................... 2.3
indicators ......................................................1.51, 5.16 → 5.18
indicators:
direction indicators ....................................................... 1.51
exterior temperature indicator ...................................... 1.82
instrument panel ........................ 1.56 → 1.67, 1.64 → 1.69
instrument panel .............................. 1.56 → 1.67, 1.64 → 1.77
instrument panel messages...................................1.70 → 1.77
interior trim
maintenance ..................................................... 4.17 – 4.18
Isofix ....................................................................... 1.46 – 1.47
J
jack ...................................................................................... 5.7
K
keys ...........................................................................1.2 → 1.5
L
lane departure warning ..........................................2.40 → 2.42
levels:
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9
coolant ........................................................................... 4.8
engine oil ....................................................................... 4.4
windscreen washer reservoir ....................................... 4.10
lifting the vehicle
changing a wheel ................................................ 5.9 – 5.10
lighting:
exterior ......................................................1.7, 1.85 → 1.91
instrument panel .......................................................... 1.87
interior .................................. 3.26 – 3.27, 5.19 – 5.20, 5.20
lights
adjustment ........................................................ 1.85 – 1.86
changing bulbs .................................................. 5.14 – 5.15
front ................................................................... 5.14 – 5.15
lights:
adjusting ........................................................... 1.85 – 1.86
brake lights ......................................................5.16 → 5.18
dipped beam headlights ........................... 1.87, 5.14 – 5.15
direction indicators ..................................1.51, 5.14 → 5.16
fog lights ............................................................. 1.89, 5.18
hazard warning ............................................................ 1.51
main beam headlights .............................. 1.87, 5.14 – 5.15
reversing lights ............................................................. 5.18
side lights ................................................1.87, 5.14 → 5.16
locking the doors ........................ 1.4, 1.6 → 1.12, 1.16 → 1.19
M
maintenance ...................................................................... 2.25
maintenance:
bodywork .......................................................... 4.15 – 4.16
interior trim ........................................................ 4.17 – 4.18
mechanical .........................................4.2 – 4.3, 6.9 → 6.14
map reading lights ......................................... 3.26 – 3.27, 3.27
7.3
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (4/5)
menu for customising the vehicle settings .............. 1.78 – 1.79
methods of restraint in addition to the seat belts ...1.31 → 1.33
multimedia (equipment) .......................................... 3.42 – 3.43
multimedia equipment ............................................ 3.42 – 3.43
Multi-Sense................................................................. 3.2 – 3.3
N
navigation ............................................................... 3.42 – 3.43
navigation system ................................................... 3.42 – 3.43
O
oil change ..................................................................... 4.4, 4.7
opening the doors ..................................................1.13 → 1.18
operating faults ......................................................5.32 → 5.38
overspeed warning ..............................1.62, 1.64, 2.52 → 2.54
P
paintwork
maintenance ..................................................... 4.15 – 4.16
parking assistance: assisted parking2.66 → 2.70, 2.73 → 2.76
parking distance control.........................................2.66 → 2.70
power-assisted steering..................................................... 1.81
puncture............................................. 5.2 – 5.3, 5.7, 5.9 – 5.10
R
radio........................................................................ 3.42 – 3.43
radio frequency remote control/key
use .......................................................................1.2 → 1.4
rear bench seat.................................................................. 3.35
rear drive wheels ..........................................2.30 → 2.39, 2.37
rear parcel shelf ................................................................. 3.37
rear screen de-icing/demisting ................................. 3.11, 3.16
rear seats........................................................................... 1.25
functions ...................................................................... 3.35
rear view camera .................................................... 2.71 – 2.72
rear view mirrors ..................................................... 1.83 – 1.84
7.4
remote control door locking
batteries ....................................................................... 5.26
remote control door locking unit ................................1.2 → 1.4
RENAULT ANTI-INTRUDER DEVICE (RAID) ................... 1.19
RENAULT card
battery .......................................................................... 5.25
use .....................................................................1.6 → 1.12
RENAULT card battery ...................................................... 5.25
replacement parts ................................................................ 6.8
reverse gear
selecting ....................................................................... 2.16
reversing sensor ....................................................2.66 → 2.70
roof bars ............................................................................ 3.41
roof rack
roof bars ....................................................................... 3.41
running in .................................................................... 2.2 – 2.3
S
safety distance warning .......................................... 2.47 – 2.48
safety distances ...................................................... 2.47 – 2.48
screen
fold-away screen .......................................................... 1.66
navigation display ......................... 1.63, 1.65, 3.42 – 3.43
navigation screen ............................ 1.63, 1.65, 3.42 – 3.43
seat belt pretensioners ..........................................1.27 → 1.30
seat belts ...............................................................1.23 → 1.30
service sheets..........................................................6.9 → 6.14
sign detection: overspeed warning ........................2.52 → 2.54
signals and lights ...................................................1.85 → 1.91
special features of diesel versions..................................... 2.15
special features of petrol vehicles ..................................... 2.14
speed limiter ..........................................................2.49 → 2.51
standing start .............................................................. 2.8 – 2.9
standing start procedure ............................................. 2.8 – 2.9
starting the engine ............................... 2.3 → 2.7, 2.10 → 2.13
ALPHABETICAL INDEX (5/5)
steering wheel
adjustment ................................................................... 1.80
Stop & Start ...........................................................2.10 → 2.13
Stop & Start function..............................................2.10 → 2.13
stopping the engine ............................................................. 2.4
storage compartment.............................................3.29 → 3.32
storage compartments ..................................3.29 → 3.32, 3.38
sun blinds .......................................................................... 3.28
sun visor ............................................................................ 3.28
sunroof...................................................................3.23 → 3.25
switching on the vehicle ignition ................................... 2.3, 2.6
T
tailgate ...................................................................3.36 → 3.39
tanks and reservoirs
brake fluid ...................................................................... 4.9
coolant ........................................................................... 4.8
tanks and reservoirs:
windscreen washer ...................................................... 4.10
technical specifications ..............................................6.5 → 6.8
telephone ................................................................ 3.42 – 3.43
temperature regulation ............................................3.9 → 3.19
tool kit .................................................................................. 5.7
towing
breakdown ........................................................ 5.30 – 5.31
towing equipment .............................................. 3.39 – 3.40
towing a caravan ............................................. 3.39 – 3.40, 6.7
towing equipment
fitting ................................................................. 3.39 – 3.40
towing hitch...................................................... 5.7, 5.30 – 5.31
towing rings ....................................................................... 3.39
towing weights ..................................................................... 6.7
traction control .......................................................2.30 → 2.39
transporting children ......1.34 – 1.35, 1.37 → 1.44, 1.46 – 1.47
transporting objects
in the luggage compartment ........................................ 3.39
trims ..................................................................................... 5.8
trip computer and warning system... 1.56 → 1.61, 1.68 → 1.77
tyre inflation kit...........................................................5.4 → 5.6
tyre pressure.............................2.27 → 2.29, 4.13 – 4.14, 5.12
tyre pressure monitor.............................................2.27 → 2.29
tyre pressures ...........................2.27 → 2.29, 4.13 – 4.14, 4.14
tyres .................... 2.24, 2.27 → 2.29, 4.13 – 4.14, 5.11 → 5.13
U
unlocking the doors ...............................................1.13 → 1.15
V
ventilation ................................................................3.6 → 3.19
W
warning buzzer ......................................................... 1.16, 1.51
warning lights................................... 1.56 → 1.61, 1.68 → 1.77
washing .................................................................. 4.15 – 4.16
weights ................................................................................ 6.7
wheelbrace .......................................................................... 5.7
wheels (safety) ......................................................5.11 → 5.13
windscreen de-icing/demisting ................................. 3.11, 3.16
windscreen washer .......................................1.92 → 1.97, 4.10
windscreen washer/wiper ......................................1.92 → 1.97
wiper blades ........................................................... 5.28 – 5.29
wipers ....................................................................1.92 → 1.97
blades ............................................................... 5.28 – 5.29
7.5
RENAULT S.A.S. SOCIÉTÉ PAR ACTIONS SIMPLIFIÉE AU CAPITAL DE 533 941 113 € / 13-15, QUAI LE GALLO
92100 BOULOGNE-BILLANCOURT R.C.S. NANTERRE 780 129 987 — SIRET 780 129 987 03591 / TÉL. : 0810 40 50 60
NU 1163-1 – 99 91 052 13R – 09/2015 – Edition anglaise